JP2016135183A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of preventing a game in an ART state from getting monotonous.SOLUTION: When "a replay AR1 during ART", "a replay AR2 during ART", "replay AR3 during ART", "a replay AR4 during ART", or "a normal replay" is determined during the ART state, a sub CPU draws a lottery on whether or not to execute a continuous performance. After it is determined to execute the continuous performance, the sub CPU executes a lottery, using a number-of-sets additional lottery table provided in a sub ROM, on whether or not to transfer to the ART state again after the termination of the ART state. When a value of an ART-state number-of-game counter provided in a sub RAM becomes "3", the sub CPU executes control of executing a continuous performance stored in a continuous performance information storage area provided in the sub RAM.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 66

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  Conventionally, a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols drawn on the peripheral surface, and a display window for displaying a part of the symbols drawn on the peripheral surfaces of the plurality of reels, the game value such as a medal by the player A gaming machine (a so-called “pachi-slot”) in which symbols are stopped and displayed on the display window by rotating all reels based on the loading operation and starting operation on the start lever, and stopping each reel based on the stop button operation by the player. )It has been known. Such a gaming machine is a player when a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on a predetermined line (hereinafter referred to as “effective line”) among symbols displayed on the display window. A privilege (for example, a medal) is given to.

  In addition, such a gaming machine detects the operation of the start lever by the player, extracts a predetermined random number value based on the detection of the operation of the start lever, and extracts the extracted random number value for each winning combination. The winning combination is determined based on the winning combination determination table in which the lottery value is defined, and reel stop control is performed based on the determined winning combination and the stop button operation by the player. Here, depending on the determined winning combination, it may be permitted to display a plurality of symbol combinations on the active line among predetermined symbol combinations.

  At this time, when “losing” is determined as the winning combination, a combination of symbols that can receive a privilege is not displayed regardless of the operation of the stop button at any timing. In addition, if the stop button is not operated at an appropriate timing, the winning combination will not be displayed on the active line in combination with the winning combination, or if the stop button is operated at any timing, There is a winning combination in which such a combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on the active line.

  In other words, if the winning combination is determined as a winning combination that does not stop and display the combination of symbols related to the winning combination unless the stop button is operated at the appropriate timing, the stop operation is performed at the appropriate timing. Since it is necessary to do this, the player is required to have a certain skill regarding the operation of the stop button.

  Further, in such a gaming machine, when a predetermined condition is satisfied in a normal state that is disadvantageous to the player, a state advantageous to the player compared to the normal state (hereinafter referred to as “specific state”). ”) Is performed. Here, the “specific state” is a bonus game in which a probability that a combination of symbols from which medals are paid out (hereinafter referred to as “a combination of symbols related to winning a prize”) is displayed on the active line is improved as compared to the normal state. (“RB (regular bonus)”, “BB (big bonus)”, “CB (challenge bonus)”, “MB (middle bonus)”, etc.) If the symbol combination is not displayed (or if the stop button is not operated in the appropriate order, the symbol combination related to the winning combination with the smaller number of medals will be displayed) In addition, “AT (assist time)” that informs the appropriate operation order of the stop button, etc., and operating the start lever without performing the medal insertion operation There are “RT (replay time)” that improves the probability that a re-game where a game is started is determined as a winning combination, “ART (assist replay time)” in which AT and RT operate simultaneously, and so on. The game is played while wishing to shift to a specific state that is advantageous to the player.

  Recently, as such a gaming machine, a gaming machine having a specific state such as the above-described AT or ART is known (for example, Patent Document 1). Such a gaming machine can improve the replay probability as compared with a normal state disadvantageous to the player, and inform the operation order of the stop button, so that the player can acquire medals. In addition, when the replay is won, the combination of symbols related to the replay is displayed on the active line regardless of the timing when the stop button is operated. The combination of symbols related to replay can be displayed on the active line without doing so.

Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2007-215772

  However, in such a gaming machine, in a specific state, the winning probability of replay is improved, so that the number of games for operating the stop button increases. Further, in the specific state, when the stop button operation order is notified, the game in the specific state is monotonous because the game is only operated by the stop button according to the notified stop button operation order. There was a problem of becoming.

  In view of such circumstances, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that prevents a game in a specific state from becoming monotonous.

  In order to solve such a problem, a gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels (for example, a left reel 18, a middle reel 19, a right reel 20) in which a plurality of symbols are arranged on a peripheral surface, and a player. Start operation detecting means (for example, start lever 10 and start switch 10 sw) for detecting a start operation by means of a winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination based on detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means (For example, a main control board 300 that executes an internal lottery process) and a reel rotation control unit that controls the rotation of the plurality of reels based on the start operation detected by the start operation detection unit ( For example, a reel control board 150 for controlling the left stepping motor 151, the middle stepping motor 152, and the right stepping motor 153, reel driving Main control board 300 for executing the control process and stop operation detecting means (for example, left stop button 11, left stop switch 11 sw, middle) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and detecting a stop operation by the player The stop button 12, the middle stop switch 12sw, the right stop button 13, the right stop switch 13sw) and the stop operation detecting means detecting the stop operation, and the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means Based on the stop control means for stopping the reel rotated by the reel rotation control means (for example, the main control board 300 for executing the processing during reel rotation), and the normal state (for example, the first RT, which is disadvantageous to the player) Normal state control means for controlling the gaming state) (for example, the main control board 30 for controlling the first RT gaming state) ) And a specific state control means (for example, a fourth RT game) for controlling a specific state (for example, a fourth RT game state) having a higher probability that a re-game is determined by the winning combination determining means compared to the normal state. A main control board 300 for controlling the state, and in the specific state, the winning combination determining means performs a continuous effect performed over a plurality of games based on the fact that the re-game is won at a predetermined timing (for example, ART Continuous effect execution lottery means (for example, the sub control board 400 that executes the continuous effect execution lottery process) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to execute in the state game number counter value “3”; When the continuous effect execution lottery means determines to execute the continuous effect, the continuous effect information storage means (for example, the continuous effect information storage unit) stores information of the continuous effect to be executed. In the case where the information of the continuous effect to be executed is stored by the sub control board 400 that executes the reservation process and the continuous effect information storage unit, the winning combination determining unit determines a predetermined winning combination (for example, the middle stage) On the basis of the determination of “cherry”, continuous effect information changing lottery means (for example, continuous effect) for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to change the information of the continuous effect to be executed stored in the continuous effect information storage means. When it is determined by the sub-control board 400) that executes the change lottery process and the continuous effect information change lottery means to change the information of the continuous effect to be executed, it is stored in the continuous effect information storage means. Continuous production information changing means (for example, a sub-control board 400 that executes a continuous production change lottery process) for performing control to change the information of the continuous production to be executed; At a predetermined timing, based on the information of the continuous effect to be executed stored in the continuous effect information storage unit, continuous effect executing means for executing the continuous effect (for example, sub-control for executing the sub effect determining process) Substrate 400).

  Here, the “normal state” refers to a gaming state that is disadvantageous for the player and has a lower probability of winning a re-game than the specific state.

  Further, the “specific state” refers to a gaming state that has a higher probability of winning a re-game than the normal state.

  Also, any timing may be applied as the “predetermined timing”.

  Further, any winning combination may be applied as the “predetermined winning combination”.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention performs display control of continuous effect execution notifying means (for example, display control of the continuous effect execution notifying area 901) for notifying that the information of the continuous effect to be executed is stored in the continuous effect information storing means. And a sub-control board 400 to be performed.

  Continuous effect change notification means (for example, display control of the battle character notification area 902) for notifying that the continuous effect information stored in the continuous effect information storage means has been changed by the continuous effect information changing means. And a sub control board 400).

  According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine that prevents a game in a specific state from becoming monotonous.

It is a figure which shows an example of the front view of a gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal structure of a cabinet. It is a figure which shows an example of the back surface of a front door. It is a figure which shows an example of the block diagram of the whole gaming machine. It is a figure which shows an example of the movable aspect of a production | presentation apparatus. It is a figure which shows an example of an arrangement | sequence data table. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in case a symbol combination group is "00". It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in case a symbol combination group is "01". It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in case a symbol combination group is "02". It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in case a symbol combination group is "03". It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol combination table in case a symbol combination group is "04". It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship of a winning combination, the operation order of a stop button, and winning a prize. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st winning combination determination table for non-RT game states. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st winning combination determination table for 1st RT gaming states. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st winning combination determination table for 2nd RT gaming states. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st winning combination determination table for 3RT gaming states. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st winning combination determination table for 4th RT gaming states. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st winning combination determination table for 5RT gaming states. It is a figure which shows an example of the 1st winning combination determination table for 6RT gaming states. It is a figure which shows an example of the 2nd winning combination determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a game state transition diagram. It is a figure which shows an example of the list of the states managed by a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the transition diagram of the state managed by a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of an effect determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of a Bonus state distribution lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of a precursor game number determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a chance state transfer lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the fake game number determination table. It is a figure which shows an example of a promotion lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of an ART preparation state transfer lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the number of games for ART state, and a lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of a drawing-back lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of an addition state transfer lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of a continuous production execution lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of a set number addition lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of a continuous production | presentation change lottery table. It is a figure which shows an example of the program start process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the main loop process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the start lever check process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the internal lottery process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the symbol code setting process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel rotation start preparation process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the reel stop pre-process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process during reel rotation in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the display determination process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the game state transfer process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of RT game state transfer process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the interruption process in a main control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the main process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the main board | substrate communication process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the command analysis process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process according to command in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of the conditional device command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for normal states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for chance precursor states in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for Bonus precursor state in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for chance states in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for Bonus preparation states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 1st Bonus states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 2nd Bonus states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 3rd Bonus states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 1st fall standby states in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for ART preparation states in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for ART states in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the stock lottery process in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for the 1st addition sign state in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for the 1st addition preparation state in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for the 1st addition state in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 2nd fall standby states in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for the 2nd surrender sign state in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for the 2nd addition preparation state in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for the 2nd addition state in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 3rd fall standby states in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 4th fall standby states in a sub control board | substrate. It is a figure which shows an example of the process at the time of the display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for Bonus preparation state at the time of the display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 1st fall standby states at the time of the display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for ART preparation state at the time of the display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 1st addition preparation states at the time of the display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 2nd addition preparation state at the time of the display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 2nd fall standby states at the time of the display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 3rd fall standby states at the time of the display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the process for 4th fall standby states at the time of the display determination command reception in a sub control board. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart in an ART state and a 4th fall standby state. It is a figure which shows an example of the animation which alert | reports that a continuous production is performed. It is a figure which shows an example of the animation which alert | reports that the continuous production was changed. It is a figure which shows an example of the animation which alert | reports that it is decided to win in a continuous production. It is a figure which shows an example of the animation displayed on a liquid crystal display device, when a continuous production is performed.

  Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be specifically described with reference to the drawings.

(Composition of gaming machine)
First, the configuration of the gaming machine 1 according to the present invention will be specifically described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating an example of a front view of a gaming machine, and FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of an internal structure of a cabinet 2. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating an example of the back surface of the front door 3.

(Game machine 1)
The gaming machine 1 in the present embodiment includes a cabinet 2 described later, a front door 3 and the like.

(Cabinet 2)
The cabinet 2 is a substantially rectangular box and has an opening on the front side. A plurality of components are attached to the cabinet 2.

(Front door 3)
The front door 3 is attached so as to close the opening on the front side of the cabinet 2. A plurality of components are attached to the front door 3.

(Hinge mechanism 4)
The hinge mechanism 4 is provided on the left side of the cabinet 2 as viewed from the front, and is provided to pivotally support the front door 3 so that it can be opened and closed.

(Keyhole 5)
The keyhole 5 is provided at the center right side of the front door 3 and is provided for unlocking the front door 3 by a locking device (not shown). Here, when a store clerk or the like of the game store performs maintenance work, changes a set value, or the like, the locking device (not shown) provided on the front door 3 is unlocked. First, a door key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole 5 of the front door 3 and is unlocked by rotating it by a predetermined angle in the clockwise direction. Next, the front door 3 is opened, and work such as maintenance work and setting value change is performed. When the maintenance work or the work such as changing the set value is completed, the front door 3 is closed and locked.

(Medal slot 6)
The medal slot 6 is provided on the upper left side of the keyhole 5 when viewed from the front, and is provided for a player to insert a medal.

(BET button 7)
The BET button 7 is provided on the left side of the medal insertion slot 6 when viewed from the front, and is provided for using “1” medals among the stored medals in the game.

(MAXBET button 8)
The MAXBET button 8 is provided on the right side of the BET button 7 when viewed from the front, and is provided to use the maximum number of medals that can be used in one game ("1" game) among the stored (credit) medals. It has been. Here, in this embodiment, the maximum value of medals that can be used in one game is “3”.

(Checkout button 9)
The settlement button 9 is provided on the back side of the BET button 7 and is provided for settlement of medals stored (credited) among medals acquired by the player. In the present embodiment, the maximum number of medals that can be stored (credited) is “50”.

(Start lever 10)
The start lever 10 is provided below the BET button 7. The start lever 10 is provided for the player to perform a start operation that triggers the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 described later. Here, based on the detection of the start operation by the player, the main control board 300 described later starts processing for obtaining a hard random number and rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 described later. The processing to do is performed.

(Left stop button 11)
The left stop button 11 is provided on the right side of the start lever 10 in front view. The left stop button 11 is provided for the player to perform a stop operation that triggers the rotation of the left reel 18 to be described later.

(Intermediate stop button 12)
The middle stop button 12 is provided on the right side of the left stop button 11 when viewed from the front. Further, the middle stop button 12 is provided for the player to perform a stop operation that triggers the stop of the rotation of the middle reel 19 described later.

(Right stop button 13)
The right stop button 13 is provided on the right side of the middle stop button 12 when viewed from the front. The right stop button 13 is provided for the player to perform a stop operation that triggers the rotation of the right reel 20 to be described later.

(Return button 14)
The return button 14 is provided on the right side of the right stop button 13 when viewed from the front. The return button 14 is provided to return a jammed medal when a medal inserted into the medal slot 6 is jammed in a selector 15 described later.

(Selector 15)
The selector 15 is provided on the back side of the front door 3. The selector 15 is provided to determine whether or not the material or shape of the medal inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 is appropriate.

(Error cancel sensor 16s)
The error release sensor 16s is provided on the back side of the keyhole 5, and is provided to release an error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1. Here, the error release sensor 16s includes a light emitting part and a light receiving part, and when a door key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole 5 and the door key (not shown) is rotated counterclockwise by a predetermined angle, A locking part (not shown) will rotate. And the light-receiving part cannot receive the light emitted from the light-emitting part when the locking part rotates. As a result, the error release sensor 16s detects an error release operation for releasing an error that has occurred in the gaming machine 1.

(Door open / close sensor 17s)
The door opening / closing sensor 17s is provided on the back side of the keyhole 5, and is provided to detect whether or not the front door 3 is open. The door opening / closing sensor 17s includes a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion. When a door key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole 5 and the door key (not shown) is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle, the door opening / closing sensor 17s is locked. The part (not shown) will rotate. And the light-receiving part cannot receive the light emitted from the light-emitting part when the locking part rotates. Thereby, the door open / close sensor 17s detects the opening of the front door 3.

(Left reel 18)
The left reel 18 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and has a cylindrical structure. Further, a translucent sheet is mounted on the peripheral surface of the cylindrical structure of the left reel 18, and a plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a row on the sheet. The left reel 18 is rotationally driven by a left stepping motor 151 described later, and a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed.

(Middle reel 19)
The middle reel 19 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and has a cylindrical structure. Further, a translucent sheet is mounted on the peripheral surface of the cylindrical structure of the middle reel 19, and a plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a row on the sheet. The middle reel 19 is driven to rotate by a middle stepping motor 152, which will be described later, and a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed.

(Right reel 20)
The right reel 20 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and has a cylindrical structure. In addition, a translucent sheet is mounted on the peripheral surface of the cylindrical structure of the right reel 20, and a plurality of types of symbols are drawn in a row on the sheet. The right reel 20 is rotationally driven by a right stepping motor 153, which will be described later, and a plurality of types of symbols are variably displayed.

(Direction button 21)
The effect button 21 is provided on the right side of the MAXBET button 8 when viewed from the front, and is provided for the player to operate at a predetermined timing. The effect button 21 is connected to an effect button sensor 710s described later. Here, the below-described sub control board 400 controls the later-described liquid crystal display device 46 and the like via the below-described effect control board 600 when an after-mentioned effect button sensor 710s detects an operation of the effect button 21. .

(Cross key 22)
The cross key 22 is provided on the right side of the effect button 21 when viewed from the front. The cross key 22 includes an up button, a down button, a left button, and a right button, and is provided for a player to operate at a predetermined timing. It has been. In addition, a cross key board 711 described later is connected to the cross key 22. The sub-control board 400 described later controls the liquid crystal display device 46 described later via the effect control board 600 described later when the cross-key board 711 described later detects the operation of the cross key 22.

(Display window 23)
The display window 23 is provided on the front side of the left reel 18, middle reel 19, and right reel 20, and a plurality of symbols drawn on the peripheral surfaces of the left reel 18, middle reel 19, and right reel 20 can be visually recognized. Is provided to do. Specifically, “3” symbols drawn on the peripheral surface of the left reel 18, “3” symbols drawn on the peripheral surface of the middle reel 19, and drawn on the peripheral surface of the right reel 20. A total of “9” symbols of “3” symbols can be viewed through the display window 23.

(Start lamp 24)
The start lamp 24 is provided above the BET button 7 and is provided to notify whether or not the start operation can be received by the start lever 10. Specifically, the main control board 300 to be described later has a case where the number of medals used in the game is “3” by the operation of the BET button 7 and the MAXBET button 8, or “3” in the medal slot 6. When a medal is inserted, a start operation is started by the start lever 10 by turning on the start lamp 24 when a combination of symbols related to “replay” to be described later is displayed on the active line in the previous game. To notify that it is possible to accept the message.

(Effective line)
Here, in the present embodiment, among the symbols displayed on the display window 23, the effective line is a symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 18, a symbol displayed on the middle stage of the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. Only the “down-right line” connecting the symbols displayed in the lower row with straight lines is the effective line.

  Here, in the present embodiment, among the symbols displayed on the display window 23, (a) the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 18, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. A line obtained by connecting the symbols displayed in the upper line with a straight line is referred to as an “upper line”. (B) The symbol displayed in the middle of the left reel 18, the symbol displayed in the middle of the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. A line connecting the symbols displayed in the middle row with a straight line is referred to as a “middle row”. (C) The symbol displayed in the lower row of the left reel 18, the symbol displayed in the lower row of the middle reel 19, and the right reel A line formed by connecting the symbols displayed in the lower part of the line 20 with a straight line is referred to as a “lower line”. (D) The symbol displayed in the lower part of the left reel 18, the symbol displayed in the middle part of the middle reel 19, The pattern displayed on the top of the reel 20 is a straight line. The do's line of "upward-sloping line". The effective line may be the upper line, the middle line, the lower line, and the upper right line instead of the lower right line. In addition to the lower right line, the upper line, the middle line, the lower line, and the right line Lines may be applied.

(First BET lamp 25)
The first BET lamp 25 is provided on the right side of the start lamp 24 when viewed from the front, and is provided to notify that the BET number is “1”. Specifically, the main control board 300 to be described later is configured to bet the BET when “1” or more medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 or when “1” or more medals are stored (credit). For example, when the button 7 or the MAXBET button 8 is operated, the first BET lamp 25 is turned on.

(Second BET lamp 26)
The second BET lamp 26 is provided above the first BET lamp 25 and is provided to notify that the BET number is “2”. Specifically, the main control board 300 to be described later is a BET in a case where “2” or more medals are inserted into the medal slot 6 or in a state where “2” or more medals are stored (credit). For example, when the button 7 is operated “2” times, the second BET lamp 26 is turned on.

(3rd BET lamp 27)
The third BET lamp 27 is provided above the second BET lamp 26 and is provided to notify that the BET number is “3”. Specifically, the main control board 300 described later has a MAXBET button when “3” medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 or in a state where “3” or more medals are stored (credit). When No. 8 is operated, the third BET lamp 27 is turned on, for example, when a combination of symbols related to “replay” to be described later is displayed on the active line in the previous game.

(Storage number indicator 28)
The stored number indicator 28 is provided on the right side of the first BET lamp 25, the second BET lamp 26, and the third BET lamp 27 as viewed from the front. The stored number display 28 is provided to display the number of stored (credit) medals of the player stored in the gaming machine 1.

(Payout number display 29)
The payout number indicator 29 is provided on the right side of the stored number indicator 28 in front view. The payout number display 29 is provided for displaying the payout number of medals to be paid out according to the combination of symbols displayed on the active line. The payout number display 29 displays that the gaming machine 1 is in an error state when the gaming machine 1 is in an error state.

(Putable indicator lamp 30)
The insertable display lamp 30 is provided on the right side of the payout number indicator 29 in front view. Here, the main control board 300, which will be described later, performs a process of turning on the insertable display lamp 30 when accepting the insertion of medals through the medal insertion slot 6. On the other hand, when the medal insertion slot 6 does not accept the insertion of medals, the main control board 300 to be described later performs a process of turning off the insertable display lamp 30. As a result, the player is notified through the medal slot 6 whether or not to accept medal insertion.

(Replay display lamp 31)
The replay display lamp 31 is provided below the throwable display lamp 30. Here, the main control board 300 described later performs a process of turning on the replay display lamp 31 when a combination of symbols related to “replay” described later is displayed on the active line. On the other hand, the main control board 300 described later displays the symbol combination related to “replay” described later on the active line in the next game in which the symbol combination related to “replay” described later is displayed on the active line. If not, processing for turning off the replay display lamp 31 is performed. This notifies that the symbol combination related to “Replay” is displayed on the active line and that the next game can be performed without using a medal.

(Bonus display unit 32)
The Bonus display part 32 is provided on the right side of the display window 23 when viewed from the front. The Bonus display unit 32 is provided with an LED. Here, when a state managed by the later-described sub-control board 400 becomes a Bonus state, the later-described sub-control board 400 passes through a later-described panel LED relay board 700 and a later-described Bonus display LED board 705. Processing to turn on the LED provided in the Bonus display unit 32 is performed. On the other hand, the sub control board 400 described later turns off the LED provided on the Bonus display unit 32 via the panel LED relay board 700 described later and the Bonus display LED board 705 described later when the Bonus state described below ends. To perform the process. As a result, the player is notified of the transition to the Bonus state and the player is informed that the Bonus state has ended.

(ART display unit 33)
The ART display unit 33 is provided below the Bonus display unit 32. The ART display unit 33 is provided with an LED. Here, when a state managed by the later-described sub-control board 400 becomes an ART state, the later-described sub-control board 400 passes through a later-described panel LED relay board 700 and an later-described ART display LED board 706. Processing to turn on the LED provided in the ART display unit 33 is performed. On the other hand, the sub control board 400 described later turns off the LED provided on the ART display unit 33 via the panel LED relay board 700 described later and the ART display LED board 706 described later when the ART state described later ends. To perform the process. As a result, the player is notified that the ART state has been entered, and the player has been informed that the ART state has ended.

(RUSH display unit 34)
The RUSH display unit 34 is provided on the left side of the display window 23 when viewed from the front. The RUSH display unit 34 is provided with an LED. Here, the sub-control board 400 described later has a panel LED relay board 700 described later and a RUSH display LED board 707 described below when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 described below becomes the first addition state. The process of turning on the LED provided in the RUSH display unit 34 is performed. On the other hand, the sub-control board 400 described later is an LED provided in the RUSH display unit 34 via a panel LED relay board 700 described later and a RUSH display LED board 707 described later when the first addition state described below is completed. The process to turn off is performed. Thus, the player is notified that the player has shifted to the first added state and that the first added state has been completed to the player.

(Stop button operation display unit 35)
The stop button operation display unit 35 is provided below the RUSH display unit 34. (a) A left stop button operation display unit 35L that emits light at a timing when it is optimal to operate the left stop button 11, and (b) ) Middle stop button operation display unit 35C that emits light at a timing when it is optimal to operate the middle stop button 12, and (c) Right stop button operation display that emits light at a timing that is optimal to operate the right stop button 13 35R, and is provided to notify the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. Each of the left stop button operation display unit 35L, the middle stop button operation display unit 35C, and the right stop button operation display unit 35R is provided with an LED. Thereby, when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 described later is the ART state, the optimal operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is notified.

(Left stop button operation display part 35L)
The left stop button operation display part 35L is provided to notify that it is the optimal timing to operate the left stop button 11. Here, when a state managed by the later-described sub-control board 400 is the ART state, when the operation of the left stop button 11 is the optimal timing, the later-described sub-control board 400 is described later. A process of turning on an LED provided on the left stop button operation display unit 35L via the panel LED relay board 700 and a stop button operation LED board 708 described later is performed. On the other hand, the sub control board 400 to be described later performs a process of turning on the LED provided in the left stop button operation display unit 35L in the ART state to be described later, and then the operation of the left stop button 11 is performed. Then, a process of turning off the LED provided on the left stop button operation display unit 35L via a panel LED relay board 700 described later and a stop button operation LED board 708 described later is performed. This notifies that it is the optimal timing to operate the left stop button 11.

(Intermediate stop button operation display part 35C)
The middle stop button operation display section 35C is provided to notify that it is the optimal timing to operate the middle stop button 12. Here, when a state managed by the sub-control board 400 to be described later is the ART state, the sub-control board 400 to be described later will be described later when the operation of the middle stop button 12 is the optimal timing. A process of turning on an LED provided on the middle stop button operation display unit 35C via the panel LED relay board 700 and a stop button operation LED board 708 described later is performed. On the other hand, the sub-control board 400 described later performs the process of turning on the LED provided in the middle stop button operation display unit 35C in the later-described ART state, and then the operation of the middle stop button 12 is performed. Then, a process of turning off the LED provided on the middle stop button operation display unit 35C via a panel LED relay board 700 described later and a stop button operation LED board 708 described later is performed. This notifies that it is the optimal timing to operate the middle stop button 12.

(Right stop button operation display part 35R)
The right stop button operation display unit 35R is provided to notify that it is an optimal timing to operate the right stop button 13. Here, when a state managed by the below-described sub control board 400 is an ART state, when the right control button 400 is operated at an optimal timing, the below-described sub control board 400 is described later. A process of turning on an LED provided on the right stop button operation display unit 35R via the panel LED relay board 700 and a stop button operation LED board 708 described later is performed. On the other hand, the sub control board 400 to be described later performs a process of turning on the LED provided in the right stop button operation display unit 35R in the ART state to be described later, and then the operation of the right stop button 13 is performed. Then, a process of turning off the LED provided on the right stop button operation display unit 35R via a panel LED relay board 700 described later and a stop button operation LED board 708 described later is performed. This notifies that it is the optimal timing to operate the right stop button 13. Accordingly, when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 described later is the ART state, the optimal operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is notified.

(Start lever LED36)
The start lever LED 36 is provided inside the start lever 10. Here, the below-described sub control board 400 performs a process of turning on or blinking the start lever LED 36 via the below-described panel LED relay board 700 and the below-described start lever LED board 709 at a predetermined timing. As a result, it is possible to perform a visual appeal to the player.

(Lumbar panel 37)
The waist panel 37 is provided below the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, and is provided to allow the player to recognize the model name, motif, and the like of the gaming machine 1.

(Tray unit 38)
The saucer unit 38 is provided below the waist panel 37. Further, the tray unit 38 is provided for receiving and storing medals discharged from a medal payout port 39 which will be described later.

(Medal payout exit 39)
The medal payout opening 39 is provided below the waist panel 37 and is provided to discharge medals paid out by a hopper 202 described later when the medals are paid out. The medal payout port 39 is provided for discharging an improper medal when a selector sensor 15s described later determines that the medal inserted into the medal slot 6 is not an appropriate medal. Further, the medal payout opening 39 is inserted at a timing when it is impossible to accept the insertion of the medal when a medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 6 at a timing when the medal insertion cannot be accepted. It is provided to eject medals.

(Upper left speaker 40)
The upper left speaker 40 is provided on the back side of the front door 3. The upper left speaker 40 is provided to output BGM, voice, sound effects, etc. when performing an effect.

(Lower left speaker 41)
The lower left speaker 41 is provided on the back side of the front door 3. The lower left speaker 41 is provided to output BGM, voice, sound effects, etc. when performing an effect.

(Upper right speaker 42)
The upper right speaker 42 is provided on the back side of the front door 3. The upper right speaker 42 is provided to output BGM, voice, sound effects, etc. when performing an effect.

(Lower right speaker 43)
The lower right speaker 43 is provided on the back side of the front door 3. The lower right speaker 43 is provided for outputting BGM, voice, sound effects, etc. when performing an effect.

(Setting display section 44)
The setting display unit 44 is provided on a main control board 300 which will be described later, and is provided for displaying a setting value of the gaming machine 1. Here, the main control board 300 described later is currently set when a setting change key (not shown) is inserted into a setting change key hole 48 described later and rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle. Processing for displaying the set value on the setting display unit 44 is performed.

(Setting change button 45)
The setting change button 45 is provided on a setting switch board 250 described later, and is provided to change a setting value. Here, the main control board 300, which will be described later, displays on the setting display unit 44 when an operation of the setting change button 45 is detected in a state where the currently set value is displayed on the setting display unit 44. A process of switching the displayed set value and displaying it is performed. The currently set value is displayed on the setting display unit 44 when a setting change key switch 49sw described later is turned on. Then, the main control board 300 described later performs a process of determining the set value when an operation of the start lever 10 is detected in a state where the currently set value is displayed on the setting display unit 44. . It should be noted that the main control board 300 to be described later performs a process of canceling the error based on the detection of the operation of the setting change button 45 when an error occurs in the gaming machine 1. In other words, in the present embodiment, the setting change button 45 has (a) a function for switching a setting value and (b) a function for canceling an error.

  In the present embodiment, the setting values are set in the “6” stage from the setting “1” to the setting “6”. For this reason, when the operation of the setting change button 45 is detected in a state where the information indicating that the setting is “1” is displayed on the setting display unit 44, the setting display unit 44 indicates that the setting is “2”. The information is displayed, and thereafter, every time the setting change button 45 is operated, the set value displayed on the setting display unit 44 is added and displayed by “1”. However, when the setting change button 45 is operated in the state where the information indicating that the setting is “6” is displayed on the setting display unit 44, the information indicating that the setting is “1” is displayed on the setting display unit 44. Will be displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the setting values are set at the “6” stage from the setting “1” to the setting “6”. However, the setting value is not limited to this. For example, the set value may be the “2” stage, the “3” stage, the “4” stage, or the “5” stage.

(Liquid crystal display device 46)
The liquid crystal display device 46 is provided above the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20, and is provided for displaying moving images, still images, and the like. Here, when a state managed by the later-described sub-control board 400 is the ART state, the later-described sub-control board 400 performs “push order bells A1 to A4” or “push-order bells” by an internal lottery process described later. When any one of “B1 to B4” is determined, processing for displaying the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 on the liquid crystal display device 46 via the effect control board 600. Do.

(External concentration terminal board 47)
The external concentration terminal board 47 is provided on the lower right side of the setting switch board 250, which will be described later, and (a) the number of medals used in the game with respect to the outside of the gaming machine 1 such as a hall computer (not shown). (B) a medal payout signal that can specify the number of medals paid out to the player, and (c) a state managed by a sub-control board 400 described later has shifted to the ART state. (D) A Bonus state signal that can specify that a state managed by a sub-control board 400 described later has shifted to a Bonus state, and (e) A state-control signal that is managed by a sub-control board 400 described later. A first added state signal that can specify that the state has shifted to the first added state; and (f) a security signal that can specify that an illegal act has been performed. It is.

  More specifically, the “ART state signal” is a signal output when the state managed by the main control board 300 shifts to the fourth RT gaming state, and the “Bonus state signal” is This is a signal that is output when the state managed by the main control board 300 shifts to the third RT gaming state, and the “first added state signal” is the state that is managed by the main control board 300 changed to the fifth RT gaming state. It is a signal that is output when transitioned.

(Setting change keyhole 48)
The setting change keyhole 48 is provided on a setting switch board 250, which will be described later, and is provided to change a setting value. A setting change key switch 49sw (described later) detects that the setting change key hole 48 is rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle with a setting change key (not shown) inserted in the setting change key hole 48. Is provided.

(Director 50)
The effect device 50 is provided on the front side of the liquid crystal display device 46. Here, when it is determined that the effect device 50 can be moved, the sub control board 400 performs a process of moving the effect device 50 in the vertical direction via the effect control board 600 and the effect device drive board 650. Do. Thereby, the effect which appeals visually to a player can be performed.

(Status board 100)
The status board 100 is provided on the back side of the front door 3 and below the display window 23. The status board 100 also includes a BET switch 7sw described later, a MAXBET switch 8sw described later, a settlement switch 9sw described later, a start switch 10sw described later, a left stop switch 11sw described later, a middle stop switch 12sw described later, and a right stop described later. A switch 13sw, a selector sensor 15s, an error release sensor 16s, a door opening / closing sensor 17s, a start lamp 24, a first BET lamp 25, a second BET lamp 26, a third BET lamp 27, a stored number indicator 28, a payout number indicator 29, The throwable display lamp 30, the replay display lamp 31, and the main control board 300 are connected.

(Reel control board 150)
The reel control board 150 is provided above the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20, and is provided to control the rotation and stop of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. . The reel control board 150 includes a left stepping motor 151 to be described later, a middle stepping motor 152 to be described later, a right stepping motor 153 to be described later, a left reel sensor 154s to be described later, a middle reel sensor 155s to be described later, and a right reel sensor 156s to be described later. And the main control board 300 are connected.

(Left stepping motor 151)
The left stepping motor 151 is provided inside the left reel 18 and is provided for controlling the left reel 18. The left stepping motor 151 has a configuration capable of stopping the rotation shaft at a specified angle. As a result, the left reel 18 rotates at a constant angle each time a pulse signal is output to the left stepping motor 151. The main control board 300 manages the rotation angle of the left reel 18 by counting the number of times the pulse signal is output to the left stepping motor 151 after detecting the reel index.

(Medium stepping motor 152)
The middle stepping motor 152 is provided inside the middle reel 19 and is provided for controlling the middle reel 19. Further, the middle stepping motor 152 has a configuration capable of stopping the rotation axis at a specified angle. As a result, the intermediate reel 19 rotates at a constant angle each time a pulse signal is output to the intermediate stepping motor 152. The main control board 300 manages the rotation angle of the middle reel 19 by counting the number of times the pulse signal is output to the middle stepping motor 152 after detecting the reel index.

(Right stepping motor 153)
The right stepping motor 153 is provided inside the right reel 20 and is provided for controlling the right reel 20. The right stepping motor 153 has a configuration capable of stopping the rotation shaft at a specified angle. As a result, the right reel 20 rotates at a constant angle each time a pulse signal is output to the right stepping motor 153. The main control board 300 manages the rotation angle of the right reel 20 by counting the number of times the pulse signal is output to the right stepping motor 153 after detecting the reel index.

(Left reel sensor 154s)
The left reel sensor 154s is provided inside the left reel 18, and includes an optical sensor having a light emitting part and a light receiving part. The left reel sensor 154s is provided to detect a reel index indicating that the left reel 18 has rotated “1”.

(Medium reel sensor 155s)
The middle reel sensor 155s is provided inside the middle reel 19, and includes an optical sensor having a light emitting part and a light receiving part. The middle reel sensor 155s is provided to detect a reel index indicating that the middle reel 19 has rotated “1”.

(Right reel sensor 156s)
The right reel sensor 156s is provided inside the right reel 20, and includes an optical sensor having a light emitting part and a light receiving part. The right reel sensor 156s is provided to detect a reel index indicating that the right reel 20 has rotated “1”.

(Power supply board 200)
The power supply board 200 is provided inside the cabinet 2 on the left side when viewed from the front, and is provided for performing control for supplying power to the gaming machine 1. The power supply board 200 is connected with a power switch 201sw described later, a hopper 202 described later, an auxiliary storage sensor 203s described later, and a main control board 300.

(Power button 201)
The power button 201 is provided on the left side of a front view of a hopper 202 described later, and is provided for performing an operation of supplying power to the gaming machine 1.

(Hopper 202)
The hopper 202 is provided on the right side of the power supply board 200 as viewed from the front, and is provided for paying out medals to the player. Here, the main control board 300, which will be described later, performs a process of driving the hopper 202 via the power supply board 200 when a combination of symbols for paying out medals is displayed on the active line. Process to pay out.

(Auxiliary storage 203)
The auxiliary storage 203 is provided on the right side of the hopper 202 as viewed from the front, and is provided to store the overflowing medals when the medals stored in the hopper 202 overflow.

(Setting switch board 250)
The setting switch board 250 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and on the upper right side of the cabinet 2 when viewed from the front. The setting switch board 250 is connected to a setting change switch 45sw described later and a setting change key switch 49sw described later.

(Main control board 300)
The main control board 300 is provided inside the cabinet 2 and on the left side of the setting switch board 250 when viewed from the front, and is provided for controlling the gaming machine 1. The main control board 300 includes a main CPU 301 described later, a main ROM 302 described later, a main RAM 303 described later, and a main random number generator 304 described later. Further, the main control board 300 is connected with a setting display section 44, an external concentration terminal board 47, a status board 100, a reel control board 150, a power supply board 200, a setting switch board 250, and a sub control board 400 described later.

(Sub control board 400)
The sub-control board 400 is provided on the left side of the main control board 300 when viewed from the front, and is provided mainly for controlling the production. The sub control board 400 includes a sub CPU 401 described later, a sub ROM 402 described later, a sub RAM 403 described later, and a sub random number generator 404 described later. Further, the main control board 300, a backlight relay board 450 described later, an effect control board 600 described later, and a panel LED relay board 700 described later are connected to the sub control board 400.

(Backlight relay board 450)
The backlight relay board 450 is provided below the main control board 300, and relays between the sub control board 400, a left backlight board 451 described later, a middle backlight board 452 described later, and a right backlight board 453 described later. Is provided to do. In addition, a sub-control board 400, a later-described left backlight board 451, a later-described middle backlight board 452, and a later-described right backlight board 453 are connected to the backlight relay board 450.

(Left backlight substrate 451)
The left backlight substrate 451 is provided inside the left reel 18 and is connected to a left backlight 461 described later. Further, the left backlight substrate 451 is provided for performing light emission control of the left backlight 461 described later from the sub control substrate 400 via the backlight relay substrate 450.

  In FIG. 2, a left stepping motor 151, a middle stepping motor 152, a right stepping motor 153, a left reel sensor 154s, a middle reel sensor 155s, a right reel sensor 156s, a left backlight board 451, a middle backlight board 452, and a right In order to describe the backlight substrate 453, illustration of sheets mounted on the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is omitted.

(Medium backlight substrate 452)
The middle backlight substrate 452 is provided inside the middle reel 19 and is connected to a middle backlight 462 described later. The middle backlight board 452 is provided for performing light emission control of the middle backlight 462, which will be described later, from the sub control board 400 via the backlight relay board 450.

(Right backlight substrate 453)
The right backlight substrate 453 is provided inside the right reel 20, and a right backlight 463 described later is connected thereto. Further, the right backlight substrate 453 is provided for performing light emission control of the right backlight 463 described later from the sub control substrate 400 via the backlight relay substrate 450.

(Amplifier board 500)
The amplifier board 500 is provided above the upper left speaker 40 and outputs BGM data, audio data, sound effect data, and the like from the upper left speaker 40, the lower left speaker 41, the upper right speaker 42, and the lower right speaker 43. It is provided to perform control. In addition, an upper left speaker 40, a lower left speaker 41, an upper right speaker 42, a lower right speaker 43, and an effect control board 600 described later are connected to the amplifier board 500.

(Production control board 600)
The effect control board 600 is provided above the back surface of the front door 3 and is provided mainly for executing an effect. The effect control board 600 includes a liquid crystal control CPU 601 described later, a liquid crystal control ROM 602 described later, a liquid crystal control RAM 603 described later, a CGROM 604 described later, a sound source IC 605 described later, a sound source ROM 606 described later, and a VDP 607 described later. Further, the effect control board 600 is connected to a liquid crystal display device 46, an amplifier board 500, and an effect device drive board 650 described later.

(Director drive board 650)
The effect device drive board 650 is provided below an effect device drive relay board 750, which will be described later, and is provided for performing control to move the effect device 50. The effect device drive board 650 includes an effect device 50, an effect control board 600, a left effect device motor 651, which will be described later, an upper left effect device sensor 652s, which will be described later, a lower left effect device sensor 653s, which will be described later, and a right effect device motor 654, which will be described later. , Later described upper right effect device sensor 655s, later described lower right effect device sensor 656s, later described left liquid crystal lift motor 657, later described upper left liquid crystal lift sensor 658s, later described lower left liquid crystal lift sensor 659s, later described right liquid crystal lift motor 660, An upper right liquid crystal lift sensor 661s, which will be described later, a lower right liquid crystal lift sensor 662s, which will be described later, and an effect device drive relay board 750, which will be described later, are connected.

(Comparator LED relay board 700)
The panel LED relay board 700 is provided above the lower left speaker 41. The sub-control board 400, a MAXBET button LED board 701 described later, a stop button LED board 702 described later, an effect button LED board 703 described later, Lumbar panel LED substrate 704, Bonus display LED substrate 705 described later, ART display LED substrate 706 described later, RUSH display LED substrate 707 described later, stop button operation LED substrate 708 described later, start lever LED substrate 709 described later, described later An effect button sensor 710s is provided to relay a cross key substrate 711, which will be described later. The panel LED relay board 700 includes a sub control board 400, a MAXBET button LED board 701, which will be described later, a stop button LED board 702, which will be described later, an effect button LED board 703, which will be described later, a waist panel LED board 704, which will be described later. Bonus display LED board 705, later-described ART display LED board 706, later-described RUSH display LED board 707, later-described stop button operation LED board 708, later-described start lever LED board 709, later-described effect button sensor 710s, later-described cross key A substrate 711 is connected.

(Director drive relay board 750)
The effect device drive relay board 750 is provided above the effect control board 600, and is provided to relay the effect device drive board 650, the effect device control board 800 described later, and the LED control board 850 described later. . The effect device drive relay board 750 is connected to an effect device drive board 650, an effect device control board 800 described later, and an LED control board 850 described later.

(Top LED board 851)
The top LED board 851 is provided above the effect control board 600 and is provided to control the top LED 861 described later. The top LED board 851 is connected to a top LED 861 described later.

(Corner LED board 852)
The corner LED boards 852 are provided on the left and right sides of the rendering device drive relay board 750, and are provided for controlling the corner LEDs 862 described later. The corner LED substrate 852 is connected to a corner LED 862 described later.

(Side LED board 853)
The side LED boards 853 are provided on the back side of the front door 3 and on both the left and right sides of the display window 23, and are provided to control the side LEDs 863 described later. Further, a side LED 863 described later is connected to the side LED substrate 853.

(Tray side LED board 854)
The saucer side LED board 854 is provided on the back side of the front door 3, outside the left lower speaker 41 and outside the right lower speaker 43, and is provided to control a saucer side LED 864 described later. ing. In addition, a saucer side LED 864 described later is connected to the saucer side LED substrate 854.

(Receiver LED board 855)
The saucer LED substrate 855 is provided on the back side of the front door 3 and on the back side of the saucer unit 38, and is provided to control a saucer LED 865 described later. In addition, a tray LED 865 described later is connected to the tray LED substrate 855.

(Top LED861)
The top LED 861 is provided above the liquid crystal display device 46. Further, the top LED 861 is designed and designed with a shape, color, pattern, pattern and the like appealing to the player's vision. Here, the sub control board 400 performs a process of turning on and blinking the top LED 861 via the effect control board 600, the effect device drive board 650, the effect device drive relay board 750, and the top LED board 851. Thereby, the effect which appeals visually to a player can be performed.

(Corner LED 862)
The corner LEDs 862 are provided on both the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 46. In addition, the corner LED 862 is designed and designed with shapes, colors, patterns, patterns, etc. appealing to the player's vision. Here, the sub control board 400 performs a process of lighting and blinking the corner LED 862 via the effect control board 600, the effect device drive board 650, the effect device drive relay board 750, and the corner LED board 852. Thereby, the effect which appeals visually to a player can be performed.

(Side LED 863)
The side LEDs 863 are provided at the left and right ends of the gaming machine 1. The side LED 863 is designed and designed with shapes, colors, patterns, patterns, etc. appealing to the player's vision. Here, the sub control board 400 performs a process of lighting and blinking the side LED 863 via the effect control board 600, the effect device drive board 650, the effect device drive relay board 750, and the side LED board 853. Thereby, the effect which appeals visually to a player can be performed.

(Tray side LED864)
The saucer side LED 864 is provided below the side LED 863. In addition, the tray side LED 864 is designed and designed with shapes, colors, patterns, patterns, etc. appealing to the player's vision. Here, the sub control board 400 performs a process of lighting and blinking the saucer side LED 864 via the effect control board 600, the effect device drive board 650, the effect device drive relay board 750, and the saucer side LED board 854. Thereby, the effect which appeals visually to a player can be performed.

(Tray LED 865)
The saucer LED 865 is provided on the front side of the saucer unit 38 in front view. In addition, the tray LED 865 is designed and designed with shapes, colors, patterns, patterns, etc. appealing to the player's vision. Here, the sub control board 400 performs a process of lighting and blinking the saucer LED 865 via the effect control board 600, the effect device drive board 650, the effect device drive relay board 750, and the saucer LED board 855. Thereby, the effect which appeals visually to a player can be performed.

(Block diagram of the entire gaming machine)
Next, a block diagram of the entire gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the gaming machine 1, a status board 100, a reel control board 150, a power board 200, a setting switch board 250, and a sub control board 400 are connected to a main control board 300 that controls main operations of the gaming machine 1.

(BET switch 7sw)
The BET switch 7sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the BET button 7. Here, the status board 100 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300 when an operation of the BET button 7 is detected by the BET switch 7sw. The main control board 300 performs a process of using “1” medals from the stored (credit) medals based on the reception of the predetermined signal from the status board 100.

(MAXBET switch 8sw)
The MAXBET switch 8sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the MAXBET button 8. Here, when the operation of the MAXBET button 8 is detected by the MAXBET switch 8sw, the status board 100 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300. The main control board 300 performs processing of using “3” medals from the stored (credit) medals based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the status board 100.

(Settlement switch 9sw)
The settlement switch 9sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the settlement button 9. Here, the status board 100 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300 when an operation of the payment button 9 is detected by the payment switch 9sw. Then, the main control board 300 performs a process of adjusting the stored medals based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the status board 100. Specifically, the main control board 300 transmits a signal to the effect that the stored medals are returned to the power supply board 200. Then, the power supply substrate 200 performs a process of returning the stored medals by driving the hopper 202.

(Start switch 10sw)
The start switch 10sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the start lever 10. Here, the status board 100 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300 when an operation of the start lever 10 is detected by the start switch 10sw. The main control board 300 performs processing for starting rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the status board 100.

(Left stop switch 11sw)
The left stop switch 11sw is a switch for detecting an operation of the left stop button 11. Here, the status board 100 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300 when the operation of the left stop button 11 is detected by the left stop switch 11sw. The main control board 300 performs a process of stopping the rotating left reel 18 based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the status board 100.

(Intermediate stop switch 12sw)
The middle stop switch 12sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the middle stop button 12. Here, the status board 100 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300 when the operation of the middle stop button 12 is detected by the middle stop switch 12sw. The main control board 300 performs a process of stopping the rotating middle reel 19 based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the status board 100.

(Right stop switch 13sw)
The right stop switch 13sw is a switch for detecting the operation of the right stop button 13. Here, the status board 100 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300 when the operation of the right stop button 13 is detected by the right stop switch 13sw. The main control board 300 performs a process of stopping the rotating right reel 20 based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the status board 100.

(Selector sensor 15s)
The selector sensor 15 s is a sensor for detecting that an appropriate medal is inserted into the medal insertion slot 6. Here, the status board 100 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300 when the selector sensor 15s detects the passage of a normal medal. Then, the main control board 300, based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the status board 100, (a) a process of adding “1” to the number of medals to be stored (credited) or (b) used for a game A process of adding “1” to the number of medals to be performed is performed.

(Setting change switch 45sw)
The setting change switch 45sw is a switch for detecting an operation of the setting change button 45. Here, the setting switch board 250 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300 when the operation of the setting change button 45 is detected by the setting change switch 45sw. Then, the main control board 300 performs a process of updating and displaying the setting value displayed on the setting display unit 44 based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the setting switch board 250.

(Setting change key switch 49sw)
The setting change key switch 49sw is a switch for detecting that a setting change key (not shown) is rotated by a predetermined angle in a state where the setting change key (not shown) is inserted into the setting change key hole 48. Here, when it is detected that the setting switch board 250 is rotated by a predetermined angle with a setting change key (not shown) being inserted into the setting change key hole 48, the setting switch board 250 is connected to the main control board 300. To transmit a predetermined signal. Then, the main control board 300 performs a process of displaying the current setting value on the setting display unit 44 based on the reception of a predetermined signal from the setting switch board 250.

(Power switch 201sw)
The power switch 201sw is a switch for detecting an operation of the power button 201. Here, the power supply board 200 performs a process of supplying power to the gaming machine 1 when the operation of the power button 201 is detected by the power switch 201sw.

(Auxiliary storage sensor 203s)
The auxiliary storage sensor 203s is a sensor for detecting that medals stored in the auxiliary storage 203 are full. Here, the power supply board 200 transmits a predetermined signal to the main control board 300 when the auxiliary storage sensor 203s detects that the medals stored in the auxiliary storage 203 are full. . The main control board 300 performs error processing when the medals stored in the auxiliary storage 203 are full based on receiving a predetermined signal from the power supply board 200.

(Main CPU 301)
The main CPU 301 is provided on the main control board 300. Further, the main CPU 301 reads a program stored in a main ROM 302, which will be described later, and performs a predetermined arithmetic process in accordance with the progress of the game, so that the status board 100, the reel control board 150, the power board 200, and the sub control board. A predetermined signal is transmitted to 400.

(Main ROM 302)
The main ROM 302 is provided on the main control board 300. The main ROM 302 is provided for storing a control program executed by the main CPU 301, a data table, data for transmitting a command to the sub control board 400, and the like. Specifically, the main ROM 302 includes an array data table (see FIG. 6) described later, a symbol combination table (see FIG. 7) whose symbol combination group is described later (see FIG. 7), and a symbol whose group combination group is “01”. A combination table (see FIG. 8), a symbol combination table (see FIG. 9) whose symbol combination group described below is “02”, a symbol combination table (see FIG. 10) whose symbol combination group is “03”, and a symbol combination described below A symbol combination table (see FIG. 11) whose group is “04”, a first winning combination determination table for a non-RT gaming state described later (see FIG. 13), and a first winning combination determination table for a first RT gaming state described later (FIG. 14). 2) a first winning combination determination table for a second RT gaming state (see FIG. 15), which will be described later, and a first winning combination determination table for a third RT gaming state, which will be described later (see FIG. 16). ), A first winning combination determination table for a 4RT gaming state described later (see FIG. 17), a first winning combination determination table for a fifth RT gaming state described later (see FIG. 18), and a first winning combination for a sixth RT gaming state described later. A combination determination table (see FIG. 19), a second winning combination determination table (see FIG. 20) described later, and the like are stored.

(Main RAM 303)
The main RAM 303 is provided on the main control board 300. The main RAM 303 is provided for storing various data determined by the execution of the program by the main CPU 301. Specifically, the main RAM 303 is provided with various storage areas such as various counters such as an insertion number counter and a setting change device operation abnormality flag storage area.

(Main random number generator 304)
The main random number generator 304 is provided on the main control board 300. The main random number generator 304 is provided for generating a random number used in a lottery or the like for determining a winning combination. Here, in the present embodiment, the main random number generator 304 generates a random number value in the range of “0” to “65535”.

(Sub CPU 401)
The sub CPU 401 is provided on the sub control board 400. In addition, the sub CPU 401 reads a program stored in a sub ROM 402 described later, and is predetermined based on information on a command received from the main control board 300, a signal input from the effect button sensor 710s and the cross key board 711. And the result of the calculation is provided to the effect control board 600, the amplifier board 500, and the like.

(Sub ROM 402)
The sub ROM 402 is provided on the sub control board 400. The sub ROM 402 is provided for storing a control program executed by the sub CPU 401, a data table, and the like. Specifically, the sub ROM 402 has an effect determination table (see FIG. 24) described later, a bonus preparation state shift lottery table (see FIG. 25) described later, a bonus state distribution lottery table (see FIG. 26) described later, and a later-described Predictor game number determination table (see FIG. 27), chance state transition lottery table (see FIG. 28) described later, fake game number determination table (see FIG. 29) described later, promotion lottery table (see FIG. 30) described later, and ART ready state transition lottery table (see FIG. 31), ART state game number extra lottery table (see FIG. 32), pull-out lottery table (see FIG. 33), and additional state transition lottery table (see FIG. 34). See), a continuous production execution lottery table described later (see FIG. 35), a set number additional lottery table described later (see FIG. 36), and a continuous performance described later. Change lottery table stores (Figure 37 reference) and the like.

(Sub RAM 403)
The sub RAM 403 is provided on the sub control board 400. The sub RAM 403 is provided for storing various data determined by the execution of the program by the sub CPU 401. Specifically, the sub RAM 403 is provided with various counters such as a Bonus precursor state game number counter and various storage areas such as a state storage area.

(Sub-random number generator 404)
The sub random number generator 404 is provided on the sub control board 400. The sub-random number generator 404 is provided for generating a random number used in a lottery or the like for determining the production. Here, in the present embodiment, the sub-random number generator 404 generates a random value in the range of “0” to “65535”.

(Left backlight 461)
The left backlight 461 is provided on the left backlight substrate 451 and includes a plurality of LEDs. Here, the sub control board 400 performs a process of causing the left backlight 461 to emit light via the backlight relay board 450 and the left backlight board 451. Thereby, the visual recognition of the symbol of the left reel 18 becomes easy.

(Medium backlight 462)
The middle backlight 462 is provided on the middle backlight substrate 452 and includes a plurality of LEDs. Here, the sub-control board 400 performs a process of causing the middle backlight 462 to emit light via the backlight relay board 450 and the middle backlight board 452. Thereby, the visual recognition of the design of the middle reel 19 is facilitated.

(Right backlight 463)
The right backlight 463 is provided on the right backlight substrate 453 and includes a plurality of LEDs. Here, the sub-control board 400 performs a process of causing the right backlight 463 to emit light via the backlight relay board 450 and the right backlight board 453. Thereby, the visual recognition of the design of the right reel 20 is facilitated.

(LCD control CPU 601)
The liquid crystal control CPU 601 is provided on the effect control board 600. The liquid crystal control CPU 601 is provided for reading a program stored in a liquid crystal control ROM 602 described later and creating a display list based on a signal received from the sub control board 400. The liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs control to display image data stored in a CGROM 604 described later on the liquid crystal display device 46.

(LCD control ROM 602)
The liquid crystal control ROM 602 is provided on the effect control board 600. The liquid crystal control ROM 602 is provided to store a control program executed by the liquid crystal control CPU 601, a data table, and the like. Specifically, the liquid crystal control ROM 602 includes a control processing program of the liquid crystal control CPU 601, a display list generation program for generating a display list, a combination of animation scenes that are referred to when displaying an animation, and an animation scene display order. A weight frame indicating an image display time, various target data such as a sprite identification number and a transfer source address, various parameters such as a sprite display position and a transfer destination address, a drawing method, and the like are stored.

(Liquid crystal control RAM 603)
The liquid crystal control RAM 603 is provided on the effect control board 600. The liquid crystal control RAM 603 functions as a data work area when the liquid crystal control CPU 601 performs arithmetic processing, and is provided to temporarily store data read from the liquid crystal control ROM 602.

(CGROM604)
The CGROM 604 is provided on the effect control board 600. The CGROM 604 includes color number information for specifying a color number for each pixel in a predetermined range of pixels (for example, “32” pixels × “32” pixels) and an α value indicating the transparency of the image. It is provided for compressing and storing image data comprising a set.

(Sound source IC 605)
The sound source IC 605 is provided on the effect control board 600. The sound source IC 605 reads a program and data related to sound stored in a sound source ROM 606, which will be described later, and generates sound signals for driving the upper left speaker 40, lower left speaker 41, upper right speaker 42, and lower right speaker 43. It is provided for.

(Sound source ROM 606)
The sound source ROM 606 is provided on the effect control board 600. The sound source ROM 606 is provided for storing a program, data, and the like related to a sound output when performing an effect.

(VDP607)
The VDP 607 is a so-called image processor, and controls to read image data from the “display frame buffer area” out of the frame buffer areas of the first frame buffer area and the second frame buffer area based on an instruction from the liquid crystal control CPU 601. Do. Then, based on the read image data, a video signal (for example, an LVDS signal or an RGB signal) is generated, and thereby control for displaying an image on the liquid crystal display device 46 is performed. The VDP 607 includes a control register (not shown), a CG bus interface, a CPU interface, a clock generation circuit, an expansion circuit, a drawing circuit, a display circuit, a memory controller, and the like, which are connected by a bus.

(Left rendering device motor 651)
The left effect device motor 651 is connected to the effect device drive board 650. The left effect device motor 651 is provided to move the effect device 50 in the vertical direction together with a later-described right effect device motor 654.

(Upper left rendering device sensor 652s)
The upper left rendering device sensor 652s is connected to the rendering device drive board 650. The upper left effect device sensor 652s is provided together with an upper right effect device sensor 655s, which will be described later, to detect that the effect device 50 has moved to a predetermined position when the effect device 50 is moved upward. .

(Lower left rendering device sensor 653s)
The lower left rendering device sensor 653s is connected to the rendering device drive board 650. Also, the lower left effect device sensor 653s is provided together with the lower right effect device sensor 656s described later to detect that the effect device 50 has moved to a predetermined position when the effect device 50 is moved downward. Yes.

(Right effect device motor 654)
The right effect device motor 654 is connected to the effect device drive board 650. The right effect device motor 654 is provided together with the left effect device motor 651 to move the effect device 50 in the vertical direction.

(Upper right rendering device sensor 655s)
The upper right rendering device sensor 655s is connected to the rendering device drive board 650. The upper right effect device sensor 655s is provided together with the upper left effect device sensor 652s to detect that the effect device 50 has moved to a predetermined position when the effect device 50 is moved upward.

(Lower right rendering device sensor 656s)
The lower right rendering device sensor 656s is connected to the rendering device drive board 650. The lower right effect device sensor 656s is provided together with the lower left effect device sensor 653s to detect that the effect device 50 has moved to a predetermined position when the effect device 50 is moved downward.

(Left LCD lift motor 657)
The left liquid crystal lift motor 657 is connected to the rendering device drive board 650. The left liquid crystal lifting / lowering motor 657 is provided to move the liquid crystal display device 46 in the vertical direction together with the right liquid crystal lifting / lowering motor 660 described later.

(Upper left LCD lift sensor 658s)
The upper left liquid crystal lift sensor 658s is connected to the rendering device drive board 650. The upper left liquid crystal lift sensor 658s is provided together with an upper right liquid crystal lift sensor 661s described later to detect that the liquid crystal display device 46 has moved to a predetermined position when the liquid crystal display device 46 is moved upward. ing.

(Lower left LCD lift sensor 659s)
The lower left liquid crystal lift sensor 659s is connected to the rendering device drive board 650. The lower left liquid crystal lift sensor 659s is provided together with the lower right liquid crystal lift sensor 662s, which will be described later, to detect that the liquid crystal display device 46 has moved to a predetermined position when the liquid crystal display device 46 is moved downward. It has been.

(Right LCD lift motor 660)
The right liquid crystal lift motor 660 is connected to the rendering device drive board 650. The right liquid crystal lifting / lowering motor 660 is provided together with the left liquid crystal lifting / lowering motor 657 to move the liquid crystal display device 46 in the vertical direction.

(Upper right LCD lift sensor 661s)
The upper right liquid crystal lift sensor 661s is connected to the rendering device drive board 650. The upper right liquid crystal lift sensor 661s is provided together with the upper left liquid crystal lift sensor 658s to detect that the liquid crystal display device 46 has moved to a predetermined position when the liquid crystal display device 46 is moved upward. .

(Lower right LCD lift sensor 662s)
The lower right liquid crystal lift sensor 662s is connected to the rendering device drive board 650. The lower right liquid crystal lift sensor 662s is provided together with the lower left liquid crystal lift sensor 659s to detect that the liquid crystal display device 46 has moved to a predetermined position when the liquid crystal display device 46 is moved downward. Yes.

(MAXBET button LED board 701)
The MAXBET button LED substrate 701 is connected to a MAXBET button LED 721 described later, and is provided for performing processing of emitting a MAXBET button LED 721 described later. Here, when the operation of the MAXBET button 8 is valid, the sub-control board 400 performs a process of emitting a later-described MAXBET button LED 721 via the MAXBET button LED board 701 of the panel LED relay board 700. Thereby, notification that the operation of the MAXBET button 8 is effective is performed.

(Stop button LED board 702)
A stop button LED board 702 is connected to a stop button LED 722 to be described later, and is provided for performing a process of emitting light to a stop button LED 722 to be described later. Here, the sub-control board 400 performs a process of emitting a stop button LED 722 to be described later via the stop button LED board 702 of the panel LED relay board 700. Specifically, the sub control board 400 emits a stop button LED 722 (described later) provided inside the left stop button 11 via the stop button LED board 702 when the left stop button 11 is valid. When the middle stop button 12 is valid, a stop button LED 722 (described later) provided inside the middle stop button 12 is emitted via the stop button LED board 702, and the right stop button 13 is valid. In some cases, a process for emitting a later-described stop button LED 722 provided inside the right stop button 13 through the stop button LED substrate 702 is performed. Thereby, notification that the operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is effective is performed.

(Production button LED board 703)
The effect button LED board 703 is connected to an effect button LED 723 described later, and is provided for performing processing of emitting an effect button LED 723 described later. Here, when the operation of the effect button 21 is valid, the sub control board 400 performs a process of emitting an effect button LED 723 described later via the effect button LED board 703 of the panel LED relay board 700. Thereby, it is notified that the operation of the effect button 21 is effective.

(Lumbar panel LED substrate 704)
A waist panel LED substrate 704 is connected to a waist panel LED 724 described later, and is provided to perform a process of emitting light from a waist panel LED 724 described later. Here, the sub-control board 400 performs a process of emitting a below-described waist panel LED 724 via the waist panel LED board 704 of the panel LED relay board 700. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the model name, motif, and the like of the gaming machine 1 drawn on the waist panel.

(Bonus display LED substrate 705)
The Bonus display LED substrate 705 is connected to the Bonus display unit 32 and is provided for performing a process of emitting light from the LED provided in the Bonus display unit 32. Here, the sub control board 400 is provided in the Bonus display unit 32 via the Bonus display LED board 705 of the panel LED relay board 700 at a timing when the state managed by the sub control board 400 shifts to the Bonus state. A process of emitting light from the LED is performed. Thereby, it notifies that it changed into the below-mentioned Bonus state.

(ART display LED substrate 706)
The ART display LED substrate 706 is connected to the ART display unit 33, and is provided for performing a process of emitting light from the LED provided in the ART display unit 33. Here, the sub control board 400 is provided in the ART display unit 33 via the ART display LED board 706 of the panel LED relay board 700 at a timing when the state managed by the sub control board 400 shifts to the ART state. A process of emitting light from the LED is performed. Thereby, it notifies that it changed to the below-mentioned ART state.

(RUSH display LED substrate 707)
The RUSH display LED substrate 707 is connected to the RUSH display unit 34 and is provided for performing a process of emitting light from the LED provided in the RUSH display unit 34. Here, the sub control board 400 is provided in the RUSH display unit 34 via the RUSH display LED board 707 of the panel LED relay board 700 at a timing when the state managed by the sub control board 400 shifts to the first addition state. The process which light-emits LED which is lighted is performed. Thereby, it notifies that it changed to the below-mentioned 1st addition state.

(Stop button operation LED board 708)
The stop button operation LED board 708 is connected to the stop button operation display unit 35 and is provided for performing a process of emitting light from the LED provided in the stop button operation display unit 35. Here, the sub control board 400 performs a process of emitting light emitted from the LEDs provided in the stop button operation display unit 35 via the stop button operation LED board 708 of the panel LED relay board 700. Specifically, when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is an ART state described later, the sub-control board 400 displays the panel LED when it is the optimal timing to operate the left stop button 11. If it is the optimal timing to light the LED provided on the left stop button operation display unit 35L and operate the middle stop button 12 via the stop button operation LED board 708 of the relay board 700, the control panel When it is the optimal timing to turn on the LED provided in the middle stop button operation display part 35C and operate the right stop button 13 via the stop button operation LED board 708 of the LED relay board 700, Through the stop button operation LED board 708 of the panel LED relay board 700, the right stop button operation display unit 35R is displayed. The process of lighting the vignetting in which LED performs. Thereby, the optimal operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 is notified.

(Start lever LED board 709)
The start lever LED substrate 709 is connected to the start lever LED 36 and is provided for performing a process of emitting light from the start lever LED 36. Here, the sub control board 400 performs a process of emitting light from the start lever LED 36 at a predetermined timing via the start lever LED board 709 of the panel LED relay board 700. Thereby, an effect appealing visually to the player is performed.

(Direction button sensor 710s)
The effect button sensor 710 s is connected to the effect button 21 and is provided to detect the operation of the effect button 21. Here, the effect button sensor 710 s transmits a predetermined signal to the sub control board 400 based on the detection of the operation of the effect button 21. Then, the sub-control board 400 performs processing when the effect button 21 is operated based on the reception of the predetermined signal.

(Cross key board 711)
The cross key board 711 is connected to the cross key 22 and is provided to detect the operation of the cross key 22. Here, the cross key board 711 transmits a predetermined signal to the sub-control board 400 based on the detection of the operation of the cross key 22. Then, the sub control board 400 performs processing when the cross key 22 is operated based on the reception of the predetermined signal.

(MAX BET button LED721)
The MAXBET button LED 721 is provided inside the MAXBET button 8 and is connected to the MAXBET button LED board 701. Here, the MAXBET button LED 721 is turned on when it is time to accept the operation of the MAXBET button 8, and is turned off when it is time to accept the operation of the MAXBET button 8. Thereby, it is notified that it is the timing to accept the operation of the MAXBET button 8 and the timing to accept the operation of the MAXBET button 8.

(Stop button LED722)
The stop button LED 722 includes (a) a left stop button LED provided in the left stop button 11, (b) a middle stop button LED provided in the middle stop button 12, and (c) a right stop. A right stop button LED provided inside the button 13 is provided. Here, the left stop button LED is provided to notify that it is time to accept the operation of the left stop button 11, and the middle stop button LED is time to accept the operation of the middle stop button 12. The right stop button LED is provided to notify that it is time to accept the operation of the right stop button 13. Specifically, the left stop button LED, middle stop button LED, and right stop button LED are lit when it is time to accept the operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, and the left stop button is turned on. When it is time to not accept the operation of the button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, the light is turned off. Accordingly, (a) it is time to accept operations of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13, and (b) operations of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are performed. Notification is made that it is a timing not to accept.

(Direction button LED723)
The effect button LED 723 is provided to notify that it is time to accept the operation of the effect button 21. Specifically, the effect button LED 723 is turned on when it is time to accept the operation of the effect button 21, and is turned off when it is time to not accept the operation of the effect button 21. Thereby, (a) it is the timing which receives operation of the production button 21, and (b) it is alert | reported that it is timing which does not receive operation of the production button 21. FIG.

(Lumbar panel LED724)
The waist panel LED 724 is provided to make it easier for the player to recognize the model name, motif, and the like of the gaming machine 1 drawn on the waist panel 37. Here, the waist panel LED 724 is lit when power is supplied to the gaming machine 1. This makes it easier for the player to recognize the model name, motif, etc. of the gaming machine 1 drawn on the waist panel 37. Note that the lumbar panel LED 724 may be turned off based on the fact that a predetermined condition has been satisfied. Thereby, it can be notified to the player that a predetermined condition has been satisfied.

(Production device control board 800)
The effect device control board 800 is provided to control an upper left effect device 811 described later, a lower left effect device 812 described later, an upper right effect device 813 described later, and a lower right effect device 814 described later. The effect device control board 800 is connected to the effect device drive relay board 750, the upper left effect device board 801, the lower left effect device board 802, the upper right effect device board 803, and the lower right effect device board 804.

(Upper left rendering device substrate 801)
An upper left effect device substrate 801 is connected to an upper left effect device 811 described later, and is provided to emit an LED provided in the upper left effect device 811 described later. Here, the sub control board 400 is provided in an upper left effect apparatus 811 described later via an effect control board 600, an effect apparatus drive board 650, an effect apparatus drive relay board 750, an effect apparatus control board 800, and an upper left effect apparatus board 801. The process which light-emits LED which is lighted is performed. Thereby, an effect appealing visually to the player is performed.

(Lower left rendering device board 802)
The lower left effect device substrate 802 is connected to a lower left effect device 812, which will be described later, and is provided to emit an LED provided in the lower left effect device 812, which will be described later. Here, the sub control board 400 is provided in the lower left effect device 812 described later via the effect control substrate 600, the effect device drive board 650, the effect device drive relay board 750, the effect device control board 800, and the lower left effect device board 802. The process which light-emits LED which is lighted is performed. Thereby, an effect appealing visually to the player is performed.

(Upper right rendering device board 803)
The upper right effect device substrate 803 is connected to an upper right effect device 813, which will be described later, and is provided to emit an LED provided in the upper right effect device 813, which will be described later. Here, the sub control board 400 is provided in an upper right effect device 813 described later via an effect control substrate 600, an effect device drive board 650, an effect device drive relay board 750, an effect device control board 800, and an upper right effect device board 803. The process which light-emits LED which is light is performed. Thereby, an effect appealing visually to the player is performed.

(Lower right rendering device board 804)
A lower right effect device substrate 804 is connected to a lower right effect device 814, which will be described later, and is provided to emit an LED provided in the lower right effect device 814, which will be described later. Here, the sub-control board 400 is transferred to the lower right effect device 814 (described later) via the effect control substrate 600, the effect device drive board 650, the effect device drive relay board 750, the effect device control board 800, and the lower right effect device board 804. The process which light-emits LED provided is performed. Thereby, an effect appealing visually to the player is performed.

(Upper left rendering device 811)
The upper left rendering device 811 is provided on the back side of the rendering device 50 and is connected to the upper left rendering device substrate 801. In addition, the upper left rendering device 811 has a built-in LED, and the LED built in the upper left rendering device 811 emits light when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

(Lower left rendering device 812)
The lower left rendering device 812 is provided on the back side of the rendering device 50 and is connected to the lower left rendering device substrate 802. In addition, the lower left rendering device 812 has a built-in LED, and the LED built in the lower left rendering device 812 emits light when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

(Upper right rendering device 813)
The upper right effect device 813 is provided on the back side of the effect device 50 and is connected to the upper right effect device substrate 803. Further, the upper right rendering device 813 has a built-in LED, and the LED built in the upper right rendering device 813 emits light when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

(Lower right rendering device 814)
The lower right rendering device 814 is provided on the back side of the rendering device 50 and is connected to the lower right rendering device substrate 804. Also, the lower right rendering device 814 has a built-in LED, and the LED built in the lower right rendering device 814 emits light when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

(LED control board 850)
The LED control board 850 is provided to control the top LED 861, the corner LED 862, the side LED 863, the saucer side LED 864, and the saucer LED 865. The LED control board 850 is connected to a top LED board 851, a corner LED board 852, a side LED board 853, a saucer side LED board 854, and a saucer LED board 855.

(Moving aspect of the rendering device 50)
Next, the movable aspect of the rendering device 50 will be described with reference to FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 5A, the rendering device 50 includes a base portion 51, a handle portion 52, and a sheath portion 53.

(Base part 51)
The base portion 51 is a member that becomes the base of the effect device 50, and has a built-in LED in a portion covered with the handle portion 52 and the sheath portion 53. Here, the sub-control board 400 performs a process of causing the LED built in the base unit 51 to emit light via the effect control board 600 and the effect device drive board 650 when executing a predetermined effect. In addition, an upper left effect device 811, a lower left effect device 812, an upper right effect device 813, and a lower right effect device 814 are provided on the back side of the base portion 51.

(Pattern 52)
The handle 52 is attached to the left side of the base 51 in front view. The handle 52 has a shape imitating a Japanese sword handle. The handle 52 is movable in the left-right direction.

(Sheath 53)
The sheath portion 53 is attached to the right side of the base portion 51 as viewed from the front. The sheath portion 53 has a shape imitating the sheath of a Japanese sword. Moreover, the sheath part 53 is movable in the left-right direction.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, the sub control board 400 drives the left effect device motor 651 and the right effect device motor 654 via the effect control board 600 and the effect device drive board 650, thereby causing the effect device 50 to move. A process that moves upward is performed. Then, when it is detected by the upper left effect device sensor 652s and the upper right effect device sensor 655s that the effect device 50 has moved to a predetermined position, the left effect device motor 651 and the right effect device motor 654 perform the operation of the effect device 50. The upward movement is stopped.

  As shown in FIG. 5C, after the effect device 50 is moved to a predetermined position, the sub control board 400 moves the handle 52 in the left direction in front view via the effect control board 600 and the effect device drive board 650. The movable process and the process of moving the sheath 53 in the right direction when viewed from the front are performed, and the upper left effect device 811 and the lower left effect device 812 are provided via the effect control board 600, the effect device drive board 650, and the effect device control board 800. Then, a process of moving the upper right effect device 813 and the lower right effect device 814 is performed. In addition, the sub control board 400 performs a process of emitting the LED incorporated in the base part that is not covered by the movement of the sheath part 53 via the effect control board 600 and the effect device drive board 650, and Via the effect control board 600, the effect device drive board 650, and the effect device control board 800, the LED incorporated in the upper left effect device 811, the LED incorporated in the lower left effect device 812, and the upper right effect device 813. The LED and the LED incorporated in the lower right effect device 814 are processed to emit light.

  Note that, after the effect by the effect device 50 as shown in FIG. 5C is performed, the sub control board 400 passes through the effect control board 600 and the effect device drive board 650, the left effect device motor 651, and the right By driving the effect device motor 654, a process of moving the effect device 50 downward is performed. When the lower left effect device sensor 653s and the lower right effect device sensor 656s detect that the effect device 50 has been moved to the original position before moving, the left effect device motor 651 and the right effect device motor 654 are detected. The downward movement of the rendering device 50 is stopped. In addition, when the sub-control board 400 moves the effect device 50 downward, the sub-control board 400 moves the handle 52 in the right direction in front view via the effect control board 600 and the effect device drive board 650, and a sheath part. 53 is moved in the left direction when viewed from the front, and through the effect control board 600, the effect device drive board 650, and the effect device control board 800, the upper left effect device 811, the lower left effect device 812, the upper right effect device 813, the right A process of returning the lower effect device 814 to the original position is performed. Further, the sub control board 400 performs a process of turning off the LED built in the base part covered with the sheath part 53 via the effect control board 600 and the effect device drive board 650, and the effect control board 600. The LED built in the upper left rendering device 811, the LED built in the lower left rendering device 812, and the LED built in the upper right rendering device 813 via the rendering device drive board 650 and the rendering device control board 800. Then, the process of turning off the LED built in the lower right effect device 814 is performed. Thereby, the rendering device 50 returns to the original position.

(Array data table)
Next, the array data table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The arrangement data table is provided in the main ROM 302, and the symbol position of the symbol displayed in the middle of the display window 23 when the left reel sensor 154s, the middle reel sensor 155s, and the right reel sensor 156s detect the reel index. Is defined as “00”. Also, symbol positions “00” to “20” are defined based on the symbol position “00”.

(The symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “00”)
Next, the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “00” will be described with reference to FIG.

  The symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “00” is stored in the main ROM 302, and includes a symbol combination name, a bit corresponding to the symbol combination name, a symbol bit name corresponding to the bit, and a symbol combination. The number of medals to be paid out to the player is defined.

  In addition, “preparation replay” is defined as the symbol bit name “REP01” in the bit “00000001” of the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “00”, and the symbol bit name “REP02” is included in the bit “00000010”. "First Bonus replay" is defined, bit "00000100" is defined as symbol bit name "REP03", "second Bonus replay" is defined, and bit "00001000" is defined as symbol bit name "REP04". "3rd Bonus Replay" is defined, "ART Replay" is defined as the symbol bit name "REP05" in the bit "00010000", and the symbol bit name "REP06" is defined in the bit "00100000". As "Special Lip ”Is defined,“ RUSH replay ”is defined for the bit“ 01000000 ”as the symbol bit name“ REP07 ”, and“ middle stage replay ”is defined for the bit“ 10000000 ”as the symbol bit name“ REP08 ”. Is stipulated.

  Here, when the combination of symbols displayed along the active line matches the symbol combination specified in the symbol combination table, the main CPU 301 pays out medals, activates a re-game, and plays a game state. Control to give a privilege such as migration is performed. For example, when the symbol combination “replay A”, “replay A”, and “BAR” is displayed on the active line, the main CPU 301 displays the symbol combination related to “preparation replay”. It determines with having been carried out, and the control which transfers to the below-mentioned 2RT gaming state is performed with the action | operation of a re-game. Note that if the symbol combination displayed along the active line does not match the symbol combination defined in the symbol combination table, it is “lost”.

(The symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “01”)
Next, a symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “01” will be described with reference to FIG.

  Similar to the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “00”, the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “01” is stored in the main ROM 302. The symbol combination name, the bit corresponding to the symbol combination name, The symbol name corresponding to the bit, the combination of symbols, and the number of medals to be paid out to the player are defined.

  In addition, in the symbol combination table bit “00000001” of the symbol combination group “01”, “upward right replay” is defined as the symbol bit name “REP09”, and the symbol bit name “00000010” includes the symbol bit name “ “BAR replay” is defined as “REP10”, “upper watermelon play” is defined as symbol bit name “REP11” in bit “00000100”, and symbol bit name “REP12” is defined in bit “00001000”. "Lower watermelon play" is defined, bit "00010000" is defined as symbol bit name "REP13", "upper cherry replay" is defined, and bit "00100000" is defined as symbol bit name "REP14". "" "Rei" is defined, "First Chance Replay" is defined in the bit "01000000" as the symbol bit name "REP15", and "10000000" is defined as the symbol bit name "REP16". The “second chance replay” is defined.

  Here, in the present embodiment, “preparation replay”, “first Bonus replay”, “second Bonus replay”, “third Bonus replay”, “ART replay”, “special replay”, “RUSH replay”, “middle replay”. ”,“ Upward right replay ”,“ BAR replay ”,“ upper watermelon play ”,“ lower watermelon play ”,“ upper cherry replay ”,“ lower cherry replay ”,“ first chance replay ”,“ second chance ” When the symbol combination related to “Replay” is displayed on the active line, the re-game is activated. Here, when the re-game operation is performed, the game can be performed without inserting medals.

(The symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “02”)
Next, the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “02” will be described with reference to FIG.

  The symbol combination table with the symbol combination group “02” is stored in the main ROM 302 in the same manner as the symbol combination table with the symbol combination group “00” and the symbol combination table with the symbol combination group “01”. The combination name, the bit corresponding to the symbol combination name, the symbol bit name corresponding to the bit, the symbol combination, and the number of medals to be paid out to the player are defined.

  Also, in the symbol combination table bit “00000001” of the symbol combination group “02”, “first push order bell” is defined as the symbol bit name “NML01”, and the symbol “00000010” includes the symbol bit. The name “NML02” is defined as “second push order bell”, the bit “00000100” is designated as the symbol bit name “NML03”, “third push order bell”, and the bit “00001000” is designated. “4th push order bell” is defined as the design bit name “NML04”, and “5th push order bell” is defined as the design bit name “NML05” in the bit “00010000”. “00100000” defines “sixth push order bell” as the symbol bit name “NML06”. The bit “01000000” defines the “seventh push order bell” as the symbol bit name “NML07”, and the bit “10000000” has the “eighth push order bell” as the symbol bit name “NML08”. It is prescribed.

(The symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “03”)
Next, the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “03” will be described with reference to FIG.

  The symbol combination table with the symbol combination group “03” includes the symbol combination table with the symbol combination group “00”, the symbol combination table with the symbol combination group “01”, and the symbol combination table with the symbol combination group “02”. Similarly, stored in the main ROM 302, the symbol combination name, the bit corresponding to the symbol combination name, the symbol bit name corresponding to the bit, the symbol combination, and the medal to be paid out to the player The number of payouts is specified.

  In addition, in the symbol combination table bit “00000001” in which the symbol combination group is “03”, the symbol bit name “NML09” is defined as “9th push order bell”, and the symbol “00000010” includes symbol bits. “10th push order bell” is defined as the name “NML10”, “11th push order bell” is defined as the design bit name “NML11” in the bit “00000100”, and the bit “00001000” Is defined with the symbol bit name “NML12” as “12th pushing order bell”, the bit “00010000” is defined with the symbol bit name “NML13” as “correct answer bell”, and the bit “00100000”. Has a bit name “NML14” and “watermelon that goes up to the right” The bit “01000000” is defined as “Right-down watermelon” as the symbol bit name “NML15”, and the bit “10000000” is defined as “first chance” as the symbol bit name “NML16”. Yes.

(The symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “04”)
Next, a symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “04” will be described with reference to FIG.

  The symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “04” is a symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “00”, a symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “01”, a symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “02”, Similar to the symbol combination table whose symbol combination group is “03”, it is stored in the main ROM 302. The symbol combination name, the bit corresponding to the symbol combination name, the symbol bit name corresponding to the bit, The combination and the number of medals to be paid out to the player are defined.

  In addition, in the symbol combination table with the symbol combination group “04”, the bit “00000001” defines “second chance” as the symbol bit name “NML17”, and the bit “00000010” includes the symbol bit name. “NML18” defines “first cherry”, bit “00000100” defines symbol bit name “NML19”, “second cherry”, and bit “00001000” includes symbol bit name “NML20” defines “middle stage cherry”, bit “00010000” defines symbol bit name “BLK01”, “first blank”, and bit “00100000” includes symbol bit name “ BLK02 "is defined as" second blank "and bit To 01000000 ", as the symbol bit name" BLK03 "" third blank "are defined, the bit" 10000000 "is" fourth blank "is defined as the symbol bit name" BLK04 ".

  Here, in the present embodiment, a combination of symbols relating to “first push order bell”, a combination of symbols relating to “second push order bell”, a combination of symbols relating to “third push order bell”, “ A combination of symbols related to “4 push order bell”, a combination of symbols related to “5th push order bell”, a combination of symbols related to “6th push order bell”, a combination of symbols related to “7th push order bell”, The combination of symbols related to “8th push order bell”, the combination of symbols related to “9th push order bell”, the combination of symbols related to “10th push order bell”, and the design related to “11th push order bell” Combination, symbol combination related to “12th push order bell”, symbol combination related to “correct answer bell”, symbol combination related to “right rising watermelon”, symbol combination related to “right falling watermelon”, “first "Combination of symbols related to" Cancele "," Combination of symbols related to "Second Chance", Combination of symbols related to "First Cherry", Combination of symbols related to "Second Cherry", When a combination of symbols is displayed on the active line, a medal is paid out.

  In addition, a combination of symbols related to “first push order bell”, a combination of symbols related to “second push order bell”, a combination of symbols related to “third push order bell”, and a “fourth push order bell” A combination of symbols, a combination of symbols related to "5th push order bell", a combination of symbols related to "6th push order bell", a combination of symbols related to "7th push order bell", and an "8th push order bell" A combination of symbols related to “9th push order bell”, a combination of symbols related to “10th push order bell”, a combination of symbols related to “11th push order bell”, “12th push order” The combination of symbols relating to "Bell", the combination of symbols relating to "Bell", the combination of symbols relating to "Right-up watermelon", the combination of symbols relating to "Right-down watermelon", and the symbol relating to "First chance" Collectively, symbol combination related to “second chance”, symbol combination related to “first cherry”, symbol combination related to “second cherry”, symbol combination related to “middle cherries” This is a combination of symbols related to “winning”.

  In addition, a combination of symbols relating to “first push order bell”, a combination of symbols relating to “second push order bell”, a combination of symbols relating to “third push order bell”, and a “fourth push order bell” A combination of symbols, a combination of symbols related to "5th push order bell", a combination of symbols related to "6th push order bell", a combination of symbols related to "7th push order bell", and an "8th push order bell" A combination of symbols related to “9th push order bell”, a combination of symbols related to “10th push order bell”, a combination of symbols related to “11th push order bell”, “12th push order” A combination of symbols relating to “bell” is collectively referred to as a combination of symbols relating to “push order bell”.

  In addition, a combination of symbols relating to “first push order bell”, a combination of symbols relating to “second push order bell”, a combination of symbols relating to “third push order bell”, and a “fourth push order bell” A combination of symbols, a combination of symbols related to "5th push order bell", a combination of symbols related to "6th push order bell", a combination of symbols related to "7th push order bell", and an "8th push order bell" A combination of symbols related to “9th push order bell”, a combination of symbols related to “10th push order bell”, a combination of symbols related to “11th push order bell”, “12th push order” A combination of symbols relating to “bell” and a combination of symbols relating to “correct bell” are collectively referred to as a combination of symbols relating to “bell”.

  In addition, a combination of symbols related to “rising watermelon” and a combination of symbols related to “downward watermelon” are collectively referred to as a combination of symbols related to “watermelon”.

  In addition, a combination of symbols related to “first chance” and a combination of symbols related to “second chance” are collectively referred to as a combination of symbols related to “chance”.

  In addition, a symbol combination related to “first cherry”, a symbol combination related to “second cherry”, and a symbol combination related to “middle cherry” are collectively referred to as a symbol combination related to “cherry”.

  In addition, a combination of symbols related to “first blank”, a combination of symbols related to “second blank”, a combination of symbols related to “third blank”, and a combination of symbols related to “fourth blank” This is a combination of symbols related to “blank”.

  On the other hand, the symbol combination related to “Preparation Replay”, the symbol combination related to “First Bonus Replay”, the symbol combination related to “Second Bonus Replay”, the symbol combination related to “Third Bonus Replay”, and “ART Replay” A combination of symbols, a combination of symbols related to “Special Replay”, a combination of symbols related to “RUSH Replay”, a combination of symbols related to “Middle Replay”, a combination of symbols related to “Right Up Replay”, “BAR Replay” A combination of symbols related to `` upper watermelon play '', a combination of symbols related to `` lower watermelon play '', a combination of symbols related to `` upper cherry replay '', a combination of symbols related to `` lower cherry replay '', Responsible for "First Chance Replay" Combination of symbols, are collectively the combination of symbols relating to the "second chance eyes Replay", that the combination of symbols relating to the "Replay".

  In addition, a symbol combination related to “First Bonus Replay”, a symbol combination related to “Second Bonus Replay”, and a symbol combination related to “Third Bonus Replay” are collectively referred to as a symbol combination related to “Bonus Replay”.

  Further, a symbol combination related to “middle replay” and a symbol combination related to “upward replay” are collectively referred to as a symbol combination related to “normal replay”.

  In addition, a combination of symbols related to “upper watermelon play” and a combination of symbols related to “lower watermelon play” are collectively referred to as a combination of symbols related to “watermelon play”.

  In addition, a symbol combination related to “upper cherry replay” and a symbol combination related to “lower cherry replay” are collectively referred to as a symbol combination related to “cherry replay”.

  In addition, the symbol combination related to “first chance replay” and the symbol combination related to “second chance replay” are collectively referred to as a symbol combination related to “chance eye replay”.

(Relationship between winning role, stop button operation order, winnings etc.)
Next, based on FIG. 12, the relationship between the winning combination, the operation order of the stop button, and winnings will be described.

  In FIG. 12, the winning number corresponding to the winning combination, the contents of the winning number, the condition device corresponding to the winning combination, whether or not each game state can be determined as the winning combination, and the stop operation order are on the active line. The relationship with the combination of the symbols which can be displayed is shown.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 12, the condition device to be operated varies depending on the determined winning combination. For example, when the winning combination of the winning number “13” is determined by the internal lottery process described later, the condition devices that are to be activated are “REP08” and “REP09”. In other words, when the winning combination of the winning number “13” is determined, any combination of symbols related to “middle replay” or symbol combination related to “upward replay” is on the active line. Will be displayed.

  In this embodiment, even if the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated at the same symbol position, the player operates the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. Depending on the order, winning combinations with different combinations of symbols on the active line are provided. For example, when the “Bonus replay BR1” with the winning number “17” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the conditional devices that are activated are “REP08”, “REP09”, “REP10”. , “REP12”, and “REP15”. In this case, when the left stop button 11 is operated for the first time, any one of the symbol combinations related to “middle replay”, “upward replay”, “BAR replay”, or “lower watermelon play” is selected. The combination of symbols will be displayed on the active line. Further, when the middle stop button 12 is operated first, the symbol combination related to “middle stage replay” is displayed on the active line. In addition, when the right stop button 13 is first operated, one of the symbol combinations related to “middle stage replay” or “BAR replay” is displayed on the active line. .

  However, in this case, when the left stop button 11 is operated for the first time, out of the symbol combinations related to “BAR replay”, the symbol combination allowed to be displayed on the effective line and the effective line There are combinations of symbols that are not allowed to be displayed. Similarly, even when the right stop button 13 is operated for the first time, among the symbol combinations related to “BAR replay”, the symbol combinations that are allowed to be displayed on the effective line and the symbol line are displayed on the effective line. There are combinations of symbols that are not allowed.

  On the other hand, a winning combination is provided in which the combination of symbols arranged on the active line does not differ regardless of the order of operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. For example, when the “common bell” of the winning number “31” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the conditional devices that are activated are “NML01”, “NML02”, “NML03”, “NML03” NML04, “NML05”, “NML06”, “NML07”, “NML08”, “NML09”, “NML10”, “NML11”, “NML12”, and “NML13”. In this case, whether the left stop button 11 is operated first, the middle stop button 12 is operated first, or the right stop button 13 is operated first, the “first push Of the symbol combinations related to “order bell”, “second push order bell”, “third push order bell”, “fourth push order bell”, or “correct answer bell”, any of the symbol combinations is an effective line. Will be displayed above.

  In addition, the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 are operated at an appropriate timing regardless of the order of operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. Otherwise, the symbol combination related to “winning” may not be displayed on the active line. For example, when the “watermelon” with the winning number “25” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the condition devices that are activated are “NML14” and “NML15”. In this case, regardless of whether the left stop button 11 is first operated, the middle stop button 12 is first operated, or the right stop button 13 is first operated, ”Or the symbol combination related to“ Right-down watermelon ”can be displayed on the active line, but the left stop button 11 and the middle stop button 12 can be displayed at an appropriate timing. If the right stop button 13 is not operated, one of the symbol combinations related to “Right-up watermelon” or the symbol combination related to “Right-down watermelon” is displayed on the active line. Never happen.

(First winning combination determination table for non-RT gaming state)
Next, the first winning combination determination table for non-RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The non-RT gaming state first winning combination determination table is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when determining a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in a non-RT gaming state described later.

  Further, in the first winning combination determination table for the non-RT gaming state, the winning number, the contents of the winning number, the lottery value for each set value, and the lottery value of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number are all set common values. Whether or not is specified. Here, in the present embodiment, the first winning combination determination table for the non-RT gaming state includes the lottery value when the setting value is “1”, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, and the setting value. The lottery value when “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, the lottery value when the setting value is “5”, and the lottery value when the setting value is “6” are defined respectively. Has been. In FIG. 13, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, the lottery value when the setting value is “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and the setting value is “5”. Illustration of lottery values in this case is omitted.

  In the first winning combination determination table for the non-RT gaming state, a lottery value is defined only for “normal replay” of the winning number “13”.

  That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the first winning combination determination table for the non-RT gaming state, the “preparation state transition replay JR1” with the winning number “01”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR2” with winning number “02”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR3” with winning number “03”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR4” with winning number “04”, “Direct hit” with winning number “05” “Bonus”, “Bonus rush replay BI1” with winning number “06”, “Bonus rush replay BI2” with winning number “07”, “Bonus rush replay BI3” with winning number “08”, “ART” with winning number “09” “Replay AR1”, “Replay AR2 during ART” with winning number “10”, “Replay AR3 during ART” with winning number “11”, “Replay AR3 during winning” “12” RT replay AR4 ”, winning number“ 14 ”“ RUSH replay R1 ”, winning number“ 15 ”“ RUSH replay R2 ”, winning number“ 16 ”“ state transition replay ”, winning number“ 17 ”“ Bonus ” “Medium Replay BR1”, Winning Number “18” “Bonus Replay BR2”, Winning Number “19” “Bonus Replay BR3”, Winning Number “20” “Watermelon Play”, Winning Number “21” “Weak” “Cherry Replay”, “Strong Cherry Replay” with the winning number “22”, and “Chance Eye Replay CR1” with the winning number “23” are not determined as the winning combination.

(First winning combination determination table for first RT gaming state)
Next, the first winning combination determination table for the first RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The first RT game state first winning combination determination table is stored in the main ROM 302, and is used when determining a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the first RT gaming state described later.

  Further, in the first winning combination determination table for the first RT gaming state, the winning number, the contents of the winning number, the lottery value for each set value, and the lottery value of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number are all set common values. Whether or not is specified. Here, in the present embodiment, the first winning combination determination table for the first RT gaming state includes the lottery value when the setting value is “1”, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, and the setting value. The lottery value when “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, the lottery value when the setting value is “5”, and the lottery value when the setting value is “6” are defined respectively. Has been. In FIG. 14, the lottery value when the set value is “2”, the lottery value when the set value is “3”, the lottery value when the set value is “4”, and the set value is “5”. Illustration of lottery values in this case is omitted.

  In addition, the first RT combination determination table for the first RT gaming state includes “preparation state transfer replay JR1” with a win number “01”, “preparation state transfer replay JR2” with a win number “02”, and “ Lottery values are defined for “preparation state transition replay JR3”, “preparation state transition replay JR4” with a winning number “04”, and “direct hit Bonus” with a winning number “05”.

  That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the first winning combination determination table for the first RT gaming state, “Bonus rush replay BI1” with the winning number “06”, winning “Bonus rush replay BI2” with the number “07”, “Bonus rush replay BI3” with the winning number “08”, “Replay during ART AR1” with the winning number “09”, “Replay AR2 during ART” with the winning number “10” The winning number “11” “ART replay AR3”, the winning number “12” “ART replay AR4”, the winning number “13” “normal replay”, the winning number “14” “RUSH replay R1”, “RUSH replay R2” with winning number “15”, “state transition replay” with winning number “16”, “Bonus replay BR1” with winning number “17” , “Replay BR2 during Bonus” with a winning number “18”, “Replay BR3 during Bonus” with a winning number “19”, “Watermelon play” with a winning number “20”, “Weak cherry replay” with a winning number “21”, The “strong cherry replay” with the winning number “22” and the “chance eye replay CR1” with the winning number “23” are not determined as the winning combination.

(First winning combination determination table for second RT gaming state)
Next, the first winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The first winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when determining the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the second RT gaming state described later.

  In the first RT combination determination table for the second RT gaming state, the winning number, the contents of the winning number, the lottery value for each set value, and the lottery value of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number are all set common values. Whether or not is specified. Here, in the present embodiment, the first winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state includes the lottery value when the setting value is “1”, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, and the setting value. The lottery value when “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, the lottery value when the setting value is “5”, and the lottery value when the setting value is “6” are defined respectively. Has been. In FIG. 15, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, the lottery value when the setting value is “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and the setting value is “5”. Illustration of lottery values in this case is omitted.

  Further, the first winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state includes “Bonus rush replay BI1” with the winning number “06”, “Bonus rush replay BI2” with the winning number “07”, and “Bonus rush” with the winning number “08”. A lottery value is defined in “Replay BI3”.

  That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the first RT combination determination table for the second RT gaming state, “preparation state transition replay JR1” with the winning number “01”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR2” with winning number “02”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR3” with winning number “03”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR4” with winning number “04”, “Direct hit” with winning number “05” “Bonus”, “09 Replay AR1” with winning number “09”, “Replay AR2 during ART” with winning number “10”, “Replay AR3 during ART” with winning number “11”, “ART” with winning number “12” “Medium Replay AR4”, “Normal Replay” with Winning Number “13”, “RUSH Replay R1” with Winning Number “14”, “RUSH Replay R2” with Winning Number “15”, Winning "Status transition replay" of issue "16", "Replay BR1 during Bonus" with winning number "17", "Replay during Bonus BR2" with winning number "18", "Replay during Bonus BR3" with winning number "19", Winning number “20” “Watermelon Play”, Winning Number “21” “Weak Cherry Replay”, Winning Number “22” “Strong Cherry Replay”, Winning Number “23” “Chance Eye Replay CR1” Will not be determined as.

(First winning combination determination table for 3RT gaming state)
Next, the first winning combination determination table for the third RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The first winning combination determination table for the third RT gaming state is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when determining the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the third RT gaming state described later.

  In the first RT combination determination table for the 3RT gaming state, the winning number, the contents of the winning number, the lottery value for each set value, and the lottery value of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number are all set common values. Whether or not is specified. Here, in this embodiment, the first winning combination determination table for the 3RT gaming state includes a lottery value when the set value is “1”, a lottery value when the set value is “2”, and the set value is The lottery value when “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, the lottery value when the setting value is “5”, and the lottery value when the setting value is “6” are defined respectively. Has been. In FIG. 16, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, the lottery value when the setting value is “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and the setting value is “5”. Illustration of lottery values in this case is omitted.

  The first RT combination determination table for the 3RT gaming state includes “normal replay” with a winning number “13”, “state transition replay” with a winning number “16”, and “Bonus replay BR1” with a winning number “17”. , “Replay BR2 during Bonus” with a winning number “18”, “Replay BR3 during Bonus” with a winning number “19”, “Watermelon play” with a winning number “20”, “Weak cherry replay” with a winning number “21”, A lottery value is defined for “strong cherry replay” with a winning number “22” and “chance eye replay CR1” with a winning number “23”.

  That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the first winning combination determination table for the 3RT gaming state, “preparation state transition replay JR1” with the winning number “01”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR2” with winning number “02”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR3” with winning number “03”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR4” with winning number “04”, “Direct hit” with winning number “05” “Bonus”, “Bonus rush replay BI1” with winning number “06”, “Bonus rush replay BI2” with winning number “07”, “Bonus rush replay BI3” with winning number “08”, “ART” with winning number “09” “Replay AR1”, “Replay AR2 during ART” with winning number “10”, “Replay AR3 during ART” with winning number “11”, and “12” as winning number ART during the replay AR4 "," RUSH replay R1 "winning numbers" 14 "," RUSH replay R2 of the winning number "15" ", will not be determined as a winning combination.

(First winning combination determination table for 4RT gaming state)
Next, the first winning combination determination table for the fourth RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The first winning combination determination table for the fourth RT gaming state is stored in the main ROM 302 and is used when determining the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the fourth RT gaming state described later.

  In the first RT winning state determination table for the 4RT gaming state, the winning number, the contents of the winning number, the lottery value for each set value, and the lottery value of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number are all set common values. Whether or not is specified. Here, in the present embodiment, the fourth RT gaming state first winning combination determination table includes a lottery value when the setting value is “1”, a lottery value when the setting value is “2”, and the setting value is The lottery value when “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, the lottery value when the setting value is “5”, and the lottery value when the setting value is “6” are defined respectively. Has been. In FIG. 17, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, the lottery value when the setting value is “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and the setting value is “5”. Illustration of lottery values in this case is omitted.

  In addition, the first winning combination determination table for the 4RT gaming state includes “Replay AR1 during ART” with a winning number “09”, “Replay AR2 during ART” with a winning number “10”, “During ART” with a winning number “11”. “Replay AR3”, “Replay AR4 during ART” with winning number “12”, “Normal replay” with winning number “13”, “Watermelon play” with winning number “20”, “Weak cherry replay” with winning number “21” A lottery value is defined for “strong cherry replay” with a winning number “22” and “chance eye replay CR1” with a winning number “23”.

  That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the first winning combination determination table for the 4RT gaming state, “preparation state transition replay JR1” with the winning number “01”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR2” with winning number “02”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR3” with winning number “03”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR4” with winning number “04”, “Direct hit” with winning number “05” “Bonus”, “Bonus rush replay BI1” with winning number “06”, “Bonus rush replay BI2” with winning number “07”, “Bonus rush replay BI3” with winning number “08”, “RUSH” with winning number “14” “Replay R1”, “RUSH Replay R2” with a winning number “15”, “State Transition Replay” with a winning number “16”, “Bonu” with a winning number “17” Medium replay BR1 "," Bonus in the Replay BR2 of the winning number "18" ", will not be determined as the" Bonus in the Replay BR3 "is the winning combination of winning numbers" 19 ".

(First winning combination determination table for the 5th RT gaming state)
Next, the first winning combination determination table for the fifth RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The first winning combination determination table for the fifth RT gaming state is stored in the main ROM 302, and is used when determining the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later in the fifth RT gaming state described later.

  In the first RT combination table for the 5RT gaming state, the winning number, the contents of the winning number, the lottery value for each set value, and the lottery value of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number are all set common values. Whether or not is specified. Here, in the present embodiment, the first winning combination determination table for the fifth RT gaming state includes the lottery value when the setting value is “1”, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, and the setting value. The lottery value when “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, the lottery value when the setting value is “5”, and the lottery value when the setting value is “6” are defined respectively. Has been. In FIG. 18, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, the lottery value when the setting value is “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and the setting value is “5”. Illustration of lottery values in this case is omitted.

  Further, the first RT combination table for the 5RT gaming state includes “RUSH replay R1” with a winning number “14”, “RUSH replay R2” with a winning number “15”, “Watermelon play” with a winning number “20”, Lottery values are defined for “weak cherry replay” with winning number “21”, “strong cherry replay” with winning number “22”, and “chance eye replay CR1” with winning number “23”.

  That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the first RT combination determination table for the fifth RT gaming state, “preparation state transition replay JR1” with the winning number “01”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR2” with winning number “02”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR3” with winning number “03”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR4” with winning number “04”, “Direct hit” with winning number “05” “Bonus”, “Bonus rush replay BI1” with winning number “06”, “Bonus rush replay BI2” with winning number “07”, “Bonus rush replay BI3” with winning number “08”, “ART” with winning number “09” “Replay AR1”, “Replay AR2 during ART” with winning number “10”, “Replay AR3 during ART” with winning number “11”, and “12” as winning number "Replay AR4 during ART", "Normal replay" with winning number "13", "Status transition replay" with winning number "16", "Replay BR1 during Bonus" with winning number "17", "Bonus" with winning number "18" “Replay BR2” and “Bonus Replay BR3” with the winning number “19” are not determined as the winning combination.

(First winning combination determination table for 6RT gaming state)
Next, the first winning combination determination table for the sixth RT gaming state will be described based on FIG.

  The first winning combination determination table for the sixth RT gaming state is stored in the main ROM 302, and is used when determining the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later in the sixth RT gaming state described later.

  Further, in the first RT combination determination table for the 6RT gaming state, the winning number, the contents of the winning number, the lottery value for each setting value, and the lottery value of the winning combination corresponding to the winning number are all set common values. Whether or not is specified. Here, in the present embodiment, the sixth RT gaming state first winning combination determination table includes the lottery value when the set value is “1”, the lottery value when the set value is “2”, and the set value. The lottery value when “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, the lottery value when the setting value is “5”, and the lottery value when the setting value is “6” are defined respectively. Has been. In FIG. 19, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, the lottery value when the setting value is “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and the setting value is “5”. Illustration of lottery values in this case is omitted.

  In addition, the first winning combination determination table for the 6RT gaming state includes “Replay AR1 during ART” with a winning number “09”, “Replay AR2 during ART” with a winning number “10”, “During ART” with a winning number “11”. A lottery value is defined for “Replay AR3” and winning number “12” “Replay AR4 during ART”.

  That is, the lottery value other than these is “0”, and when the lottery is performed using the first RT combination determination table for the fifth RT gaming state, “preparation state transition replay JR1” with the winning number “01”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR2” with winning number “02”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR3” with winning number “03”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR4” with winning number “04”, “Direct hit” with winning number “05” “Bonus”, “Bonus rush replay BI1” with winning number “06”, “Bonus rush replay BI2” with winning number “07”, “Bonus rush replay BI3” with winning number “08”, “Normal” with winning number “13” "Replay", "RUSH replay R1" with winning number "14", "RUSH replay R2" with winning number "15", "Status transition rep" with winning number "16" "Bonus replay BR1" with winning number "17", "Replay BR2 with Bonus" with winning number "18", "Replay BR3 in Bonus" with winning number "19", "Watermelon with winning number" 20 " “Replay”, “weak cherry replay” with a winning number “21”, “strong cherry replay” with a winning number “22”, and “chance eye replay CR1” with a winning number “23” are not determined as winning combinations.

  The first winning combination determination table for the non-RT gaming state, the first winning combination determination table for the first RT gaming state, the first winning combination determination table for the second RT gaming state, the first winning combination determination table for the third RT gaming state, The first winning combination determination table for the fourth RT gaming state, the first winning combination determination table for the fifth RT gaming state, and the first winning combination determination table for the sixth RT gaming state are collectively referred to as a “first winning combination determination table”.

  Note that “preparation state transfer replay JR1” with a winning number “01”, “preparation state transfer replay JR2” with a winning number “02”, “preparation state transfer replay JR3” with a winning number “03”, and a winning number “ 04 ”“ preparation state transition replay JR4 ”is collectively referred to as“ preparation state transition replay ”.

  Also, “Bonus rush replay BI1” with winning number “06”, “Bonus rush replay BI2” with winning number “07”, and “Bonus rush replay BI3” with winning number “08” are collectively referred to as “Bonus rush replay BI3”. "

  Also, the winning number “09” “ART replay AR1”, the winning number “10” “ART replay AR2”, the winning number “11” “ART replay AR3”, and the winning number “12”. “Replay during ART AR4” is collectively referred to as “replay during ART”.

  The winning number “14” “RUSH replay R1” and the winning number “15” “RUSH replay R2” are collectively referred to as “RUSH replay”.

  Also, “Replay BR1 during Bonus” with the winning number “17”, “Replay BR2 during Bonus” with the winning number “18”, and “Replay BR3 during Bonus” with the winning number “19” are collectively referred to as “Replay during Bonus”. "

  Also, “weak cherry replay” with a winning number “21” and “strong cherry replay” with a winning number “22” are collectively referred to as “cherry replay”.

(Second winning combination determination table)
Next, the second winning combination determination table will be described based on FIG.

  The second winning combination determination table is stored in the main ROM 302, and will be described later in a non-RT gaming state, a first RT gaming state, a second RT gaming state, a third RT gaming state, a fourth RT gaming state, a fifth RT gaming state, and a sixth RT. This is used when a winning combination is determined by an internal lottery process described later in the gaming state.

  Similarly to the first winning combination determination table, the second winning combination determination table includes all the winning numbers, the contents of the winning numbers, the lottery values for each set value, and the lottery values of the winning combinations corresponding to the winning numbers. Whether the value is a common setting value is defined. Here, in the present embodiment, the second winning combination determination table includes a lottery value when the setting value is “1”, a lottery value when the setting value is “2”, and a case where the setting value is “3”. The lottery value, the lottery value when the set value is “4”, the lottery value when the set value is “5”, and the lottery value when the set value is “6” are respectively defined. In FIG. 20, the lottery value when the setting value is “2”, the lottery value when the setting value is “3”, the lottery value when the setting value is “4”, and the setting value is “5”. Illustration of lottery values in this case is omitted.

  Further, the second winning combination determination table includes “chance eye replay CR2” with a winning number “24”, “watermelon” with a winning number “25”, “weak cherry” with a winning number “26”, and a winning number “27”. “Strong Cherry”, “Middle Cherry” with Winning Number “28”, “Chance Eye CN1” with Winning Number “29”, “Chance Eye CN2” with Winning Number “30”, “Common Bell” with Winning Number “31” , “Push Order Bell A1” with a winning number “32”, “Push Order Bell B1” with a winning number “33”, “Push Order Bell A2” with a winning number “34”, “Push Order Bell” with a winning number “35”. “B2”, “Push Order Bell A3” with a winning number “36”, “Push Order Bell B3” with a winning number “37”, “Push Order Bell A4” with a winning number “38”, “Press” A lottery value is defined for “order bell B4”.

  Here, the relationship between the first winning combination determination table and the second winning combination determination table will be described. When a lottery is performed using the first winning combination determination table, the winning combination is determined according to the current gaming state. There are rules regarding winning roles and winning roles that are not determined as winning roles. On the other hand, when a lottery is performed using the second winning combination determination table, a winning combination that can be determined as a winning combination in all game states is defined.

  The “chance eye replay CR1” with the winning number “23” and the “chance eye replay CR2” with the winning number “24” are collectively referred to as “chance eye replay”.

  Also, the “weak cherry” with the winning number “26”, the “strong cherry” with the winning number “27”, and the “middle cherry” with the winning number “28” are collectively referred to as “cherry”.

  The “chance eye CN1” with the winning number “29” and the “chance eye CN2” with the winning number “30” are collectively referred to as “chance eyes”.

  Also, the “common bell” of the winning number “31”, the “push order bell A1” of the winning number “32”, the “push order bell B1” of the winning number “33”, and the “push” of the winning number “34” "Sequence Bell A2", "Push Order Bell B2" with Winning Number "35", "Push Order Bell A3" with Winning Number "36", "Push Order Bell B3" with Winning Number "37", Winning Number The “push order bell A4” of “38” and the “push order bell B4” of the winning number “39” are collectively referred to as “bell”.

  In addition, the “push order bell A1” of the winning number “32”, the “push order bell B1” of the win number “33”, the “push order bell A2” of the win number “34”, and the win number “35”. “Push Order Bell B2”, “Push Order Bell A3” with a winning number “36”, “Push Order Bell B3” with a winning number “37”, “Push Order Bell A4” with a winning number “38”, The “push order bell B4” of the winning number “39” is collectively referred to as “push order bell”.

(Game state transition diagram)
Next, the game state transition diagram will be described with reference to FIG.

  The game state transition diagram defines a current game state, a transition condition that is a condition for transitioning the game state, and a game state of a transition destination.

  Here, in the case where the current gaming state is a non-RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “blank” is displayed on the active line, the non-RT gaming state is Transition to the first RT gaming state.

  In addition, when the current gaming state is the first RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “preparation replay” is displayed on the active line, the first RT gaming state is Transition to the second RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the first RT gaming state, when one of the symbol combinations related to “Bonus Replay” is displayed on the active line, the first RT gaming state is Transition to the third RT gaming state.

  In addition, when the current gaming state is the second RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “blank” is displayed on the active line, the second RT gaming state is changed to the second RT gaming state. Transition to the 1RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the second RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “Bonus Replay” is displayed on the active line, Transition to the third RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the second RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “ART replay” is displayed on the active line, Transition to the fourth RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the second RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “RUSH replay” is displayed on the active line, Transition to the fifth RT gaming state.

  In addition, when the current gaming state is the third RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “blank” is displayed on the active line, the third RT gaming state is changed to the third RT gaming state. Transition to the 1RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, in the case where the current gaming state is the third RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “ART replay” is displayed on the active line, Transition to the fourth RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the third RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “RUSH replay” is displayed on the active line, Transition to the fifth RT gaming state.

  In addition, when the current gaming state is the fourth RT gaming state, when any symbol combination among the symbol combinations related to “blank” is displayed on the activated line, the fourth RT gaming state is changed to the fourth RT gaming state. Transition to the 1RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the fourth RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “RUSH replay” is displayed on the active line, the fourth RT gaming state Transition to the fifth RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, in the case where the current gaming state is the 4RT gaming state, when one of the symbol combinations related to “special replay” is displayed on the active line, Transition to the sixth RT gaming state.

  In addition, when the current gaming state is the fifth RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “blank” is displayed on the active line, the fifth RT gaming state is changed to the fifth RT gaming state. Transition to the 1RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the fifth RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “Bonus Replay” is displayed on the active line, Transition to the third RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, when the current gaming state is the fifth RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “ART replay” is displayed on the active line, Transition to the fourth RT gaming state.

  In addition, when the current gaming state is the sixth RT gaming state, when any symbol combination among the symbol combinations related to “blank” is displayed on the active line, the sixth RT gaming state is changed to the sixth RT gaming state. Transition to the 1RT gaming state.

  On the other hand, in the case where the current gaming state is the sixth RT gaming state, when any of the symbol combinations related to “ART replay” is displayed on the active line, from the sixth RT gaming state, Transition to the fourth RT gaming state.

(List of states managed by sub control board)
Next, a list of states managed by the sub control board will be described with reference to FIG.

  The list of states managed by the sub control board is defined for the state names and the numbers corresponding to the state names. Here, the states managed by the sub-control board in this embodiment are “normal state” with the state number “01”, “chance precursor state” with the state number “02”, and “state with the state number“ 03 ”. “Bonus precursor state”, “Chance state” with state number “04”, “Bonus ready state” with state number “05”, “First Bonus state” with state number “06”, state number “07” “Second Bonus State”, “Third Bonus State” with State Number “08”, “First Falling Standby State” with State Number “09”, “ART Ready State” with State Number “10”, State Number “11” “ART state”, “12” “first additional sign state”, “13” “first additional preparation state”, “14” “first additional state” "Status", status number "15" "Falling standby state", "Second addition sign state" with state number "16", "Second addition preparation state" with state number "17", "Second addition state" with state number "18", state A “third fall standby state” with a number “19” and a “fourth fall standby state” with a state number “20” are defined.

(Transition diagram of states managed by sub-control board)
Next, a state transition diagram managed by the sub control board will be described with reference to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of states managed by the sub control board 400 are provided separately from the gaming state controlled by the main control board 300. Hereinafter, description of each state and conditions for transition to each state will be given.

(Normal state)
The normal state is a disadvantageous state for the player. Here, in the present embodiment, in addition to performing the lottery for shifting to the Bonus ready state, the normal state is performed in the normal state by performing the lottery for shifting to the chance state that is easier to shift to the Bonus state than the normal state. Improves interest in games.

  Here, in the normal state, when the chance state shift lottery is won, control for shifting to the chance sign state is performed. Further, when the Bonus preparation state transition lottery is won, or when the value of a later-described ceiling game number counter becomes “0”, control for transitioning to the Bonus precursor state is performed. Furthermore, when “direct hit Bonus” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, control for shifting to the third Bonus state is performed.

(Predicting chance)
The chance precursor state is a state in which the transition is made before the transition from the normal state to the chance state. Here, in the chance sign state, an effect that suggests transition to the chance state is performed until the value of the game number counter for chance sign state described later becomes “0”. Thereby, it can be made to expect a player to shift to a chance state.

  Here, in the chance sign state, when the value of the game sign counter for chance sign state described later becomes “0”, control to shift to the chance state is performed. In addition, when the Bonus preparation state transition lottery is won in the chance sign state, or when the value of a later-described ceiling game number counter becomes “0”, control to transition to the Bonus sign state is performed. Furthermore, when “direct hit Bonus” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, control for shifting to the third Bonus state is performed.

(Bonus precursor state)
The Bonus precursor state is a state in which the transition is made before the transition from the normal state to the Bonus state. Here, the Bonus precursor state has an effect that suggests transition to the Bonus state until the value of the Bonus precursor state game number counter reaches “0”. As a result, the player can be expected to shift to the Bonus state.

  Here, in the Bonus precursor state, when the value of the below-mentioned Bonus precursor state game number counter is “0”, or when the value of the below-described ceiling game number counter is “0”, the Bonus preparation is performed. Control to shift to the state is performed. Furthermore, when “direct hit Bonus” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, control for shifting to the third Bonus state is performed.

(Chance state)
The chance state is a state in which the transition to the Bonus preparation state is easier than in the normal state. As a result, when the player shifts to the chance state, the player expects to shift to the Bonus preparation state.

  Here, in the chance state, when the value of a chance state game number counter, which will be described later, becomes “0”, control for shifting to the normal state is performed. In the chance state, when the bonus preparation state transition lottery is won, or when the value of a later-described ceiling game number counter becomes “0”, control for shifting to the bonus preparation state is performed. Furthermore, when “direct hit Bonus” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, control for shifting to the third Bonus state is performed.

(Bonus ready state)
The Bonus preparation state is a state in which the transition is made before the transition to the first Bonus state, the second Bonus state, and the third Bonus state. Here, in the Bonus preparation state, when the symbol combination related to “Bonus Replay” is displayed on the active line, control is performed to shift to one of the first Bonus state, the second Bonus state, and the third Bonus state. . In addition, when “direct hit Bonus” is determined by an internal lottery process to be described later, control for shifting to the third Bonus state is performed.

  Here, in the Bonus preparation state, “Preparation state transfer replay JR1”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR2”, “Preparation state transfer replay JR3”, or “Preparation state transfer replay JR4” is performed as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later. Is determined, the stop button operation display unit 35 and the liquid crystal display device 46 are notified of information for displaying the symbol combination related to “preparation replay” on the active line.

  Further, in the Bonus ready state, when “Bonus rush replay BI1”, “Bonus rush replay BI2”, or “Bonus rush replay BI3” is determined as a winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the Bonus standby described later is performed. Based on the value stored in the information storage area, the symbol combination related to “First Bonus Replay”, the symbol combination related to “Second Bonus Replay”, and the symbol combination related to “Third Bonus Replay” are placed on the active line. Information for display is notified by the stop button operation display unit 35 and the liquid crystal display device 46.

(First Bonus state)
The first Bonus state is an advantageous state for the player as compared to the normal state. Here, in the first Bonus state, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to shift to the ART preparation state. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting to shift to the ART ready state, so the interest in the game in the first Bonus state is improved.

  Here, in the first Bonus state, when it is determined to shift to the ART preparation state, control to shift to the ART preparation state is performed after the end of the first Bonus state. Further, in the first Bonus state, when it is not determined to shift to the ART preparation state, control to shift to the first fall standby state is performed after the end of the first Bonus state.

(Second Bonus state)
The second Bonus state is an advantageous state for the player as compared to the normal state. Here, in the second Bonus state, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to shift to the ART preparation state as in the first Bonus state. In the present embodiment, the lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the ART ready state in the second Bonus state shifts to the ART ready state as compared to the lottery for determining whether or not to shift to the ART ready state for the first Bonus state. The probability of being determined is high. As a result, the player plays the game while expecting to shift to the ART preparation state, so that the interest in the game in the second Bonus state is improved.

  Here, in the second Bonus state, when it is determined to shift to the ART preparation state, control to shift to the ART preparation state is performed after the end of the second Bonus state. Further, in the second Bonus state, when it is not determined to shift to the ART preparation state, control to shift to the first fall standby state is performed after the end of the second Bonus state.

(3rd Bonus state)
The third Bonus state is an advantageous state for the player as compared to the normal state. Here, the third Bonus state is different from the first Bonus state and the second Bonus state, and after the third Bonus is finished, control is always performed to shift to the ART preparation state. Thereby, since the player will play a game while expecting to shift to the third Bonus state, the interest in the game is improved.

(First fall standby state)
The first fall standby state is a state in which the transition to the ART ready state is not determined in the first Bonus state or the second Bonus state. Further, in the first fall standby state, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to shift to the ART preparation state. Here, in the first fall standby state, control for shifting to the normal state is performed based on the fact that the combination of symbols related to “blank” is displayed on the active line. Further, in the first fall standby state, when it is determined as a result of lottery whether or not to shift to the ART ready state, control to shift to the ART ready state is performed. Is called.

  Here, in the first fall standby state, “push order bell A1”, “push order bell A2”, “push order bell A3”, “push order bell A4”, “press When the “order bell B1”, “push order bell B2”, “push order bell B3”, or “push order bell B4” is determined, the combination of symbols related to “bell” is displayed on the active line. This information is not notified. In addition, when “state transition replay” is determined as the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, information for displaying a combination of symbols related to “normal replay” on the active line is notified. Accordingly, as the winning combination, “push order bell A1”, “push order bell A2”, “push order bell A3”, “push order bell A4”, “push order bell B1”, “push order bell B2”, “push order” If “Bell B3” or “Push Order Bell B4” is determined and the symbol combination related to “Bell” cannot be displayed on the effective line, the symbol combination related to “Blank” is the effective line. It will be displayed above and will shift to the normal state.

(ART ready state)
The ART ready state is the first Bonus state or the second Bonus state, and after the first Bonus state or the second Bonus state is finished after it is determined to shift to the ART ready state, or the third Bonus state ART state is finished. It is in a state to shift to the case. Here, in the ART preparation state, control for shifting to the ART state is performed based on the combination of symbols related to “ART replay” being displayed on the active line.

  Here, in the ART ready state, when “state transition replay” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, information for displaying a combination of symbols related to “ART replay” on the active line Is notified by the stop button operation display unit 35 or the liquid crystal display device 46.

(ART state)
The ART state is an advantageous state for the player. Specifically, in the ART state, when “push order bell” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, information for displaying a combination of symbols related to “bell” on the active line is displayed. Control which notifies by the stop button operation display part 35 or the liquid crystal display device 46 is performed.

  Here, in the ART state, when it is determined to shift to the first added state, control to shift to the first added sign state is performed, and when it is determined to shift to the second added state Is controlled so as to shift to the second added sign state. Further, when the value of an ART state game number counter, which will be described later, becomes “0”, control for shifting to the fourth fall standby state is performed.

(First sign of sign)
The first extra sign state is a state that shifts from the ART state to the first additional preparation state. Here, in the first extra sign state, an effect suggesting that the first extra sign state is shifted to the first additional state until the value of a first extra sign state game number counter described later becomes “0” is performed. Thereby, it can be made to expect a player to transfer to a 1st addition state. Here, in the first extra sign state, when a value of a first extra sign state game number counter, which will be described later, becomes “0”, control for shifting to the first extra preparation state is performed.

(First addition preparation state)
The first add-on preparation state is a state that shifts from the first add-on sign state to the first add-on state. Here, in the first addition preparation state, control for shifting to the first addition state is performed based on the combination of symbols relating to “RUSH replay” being displayed on the active line.

  Here, in the first addition preparation state, when “art replay AR2” or “ART replay AR4” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, the symbol related to “RUSH replay” Information for displaying the combination on the effective line is notified by the stop button operation display unit 35 or the liquid crystal display device 46.

(First addition state)
The first added state is a state advantageous for the player, and is a state in which the number of games that can be played in the ART state is added. Specifically, the number of games that can be played in the ART state is added based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process described later. Here, in the first added state, control for shifting to the second fall standby state is performed based on the value of a first added state game number counter described later being “0”.

(Second fall standby state)
The second fall standby state is a state before the transition to the ART state after the first addition state is completed. Further, in the second fall standby state, control for shifting to the ART state is performed based on the combination of symbols related to “ART replay” being displayed on the active line.

  Here, in the second fall standby state, when “RUSH replay R1” or “RUSH replay R2” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process to be described later, a combination of symbols related to “ART replay” is selected. Information to be displayed on the active line is notified by the stop button operation display unit 35 and the liquid crystal display device 46.

(Second sign of sign)
The second surrender sign state is a state that shifts from the ART state to the second surplus preparation state. Here, in the second surrender sign state, an effect that suggests transition to the second surrender state is performed until the value of the second surrender sign game number counter described later becomes “0”. Thereby, it can be made to expect a player to transfer to a 2nd addition state. Here, when the value of a game counter for the number of second surrender sign state described later becomes “0” in the second surrender sign state, control for shifting to the second surrender preparation state is performed.

(2nd additional preparation state)
The second add-on preparation state is a state that shifts from the second add-on sign state to the second add-on state. Here, in the second addition preparation state, control for shifting to the second addition state is performed based on the combination of symbols related to “special replay” being displayed on the active line.

  Here, in the second addition preparation state, when “state transition replay” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, a combination of symbols related to “special replay” is displayed on the active line Is notified by the stop button operation display unit 35 and the liquid crystal display device 46.

(Second addition state)
The second added state is a state advantageous for the player, and is a state in which the number of games that can be played in the ART state is added. Specifically, the number of games that can be played in the ART state is added based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process described later. Here, in the second added state, control for shifting to the third fall standby state is performed based on the value of a second added state game number counter described later being “0”.

(Third fall standby state)
The third fall standby state is a state before the transition to the ART state after the second addition state ends. Further, in the second fall standby state, control for shifting to the ART state is performed based on the combination of symbols related to “ART replay” being displayed on the active line.

  Here, in the third fall standby state, when “winning ART replay AR1”, “ART replay AR2” or “ART replay AR3” is determined as the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, Information for displaying the symbol combination related to “Replay” on the active line is notified by the stop button operation display unit 35 or the liquid crystal display device 46.

(4th falling standby state)
The fourth fall standby state is a state that shifts after the ART state ends. Further, in the fourth fall standby state, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to shift to the ART state. Here, in the fourth fall standby state, control for shifting to the normal state is performed based on the fact that the combination of symbols related to “blank” is displayed on the active line. Further, in the fourth fall standby state, when it is determined to shift to the ART state as a result of lottery of whether to shift to the ART state, control to shift to the ART state is performed.

  Here, in the fourth fall standby state, “push order bell A1”, “push order bell A2”, “push order bell A3”, “push order bell A4”, “push” are performed by an internal lottery process described later. When the “order bell B1”, “push order bell B2”, “push order bell B3”, or “push order bell B4” is determined, the combination of symbols related to “bell” is displayed on the active line. This information is not notified. In addition, when “state transition replay” is determined as the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, information for displaying a combination of symbols related to “normal replay” on the active line is notified. Accordingly, as the winning combination, “push order bell A1”, “push order bell A2”, “push order bell A3”, “push order bell A4”, “push order bell B1”, “push order bell B2”, “push order” If “Bell B3” or “Push Order Bell B4” is determined and the symbol combination related to “Bell” cannot be displayed on the effective line, the symbol combination related to “Blank” is the effective line. It will be displayed above and will shift to the normal state.

  In the present embodiment, the ART state and the like are managed by the sub control board 400, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the ART state or the like may be managed by the main control board 300.

(Direction decision table)
Next, the effect determination table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The effect determination table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is provided for determining effects to be performed in each state managed by the sub control board 400. Specifically, “production No.” and production contents corresponding to “production No.” are defined. In addition, in the effect determination table, conditions for executing effects such as a state managed by the sub control board 400 are defined.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the effect determination table includes (a) a normal state effect determination table (see FIG. 24A) used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the normal state, and ( b) A chance sign state effect determination table (see FIG. 24B) used when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is a chance sign state, and (c) the state managed by the sub control board 400. Bonus precursor state effect determination table (see FIG. 24C) used in the case of the Bonus precursor state, and (d) Chance state effect determination used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the chance state. Table (see FIG. 24D) and (e) Bo used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the Bonus ready state us preparation state effect determination table (see FIG. 24E) and (f) first Bonus state effect determination table used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the first Bonus state (FIG. 24F). )), (G) a second Bonus state effect determination table (not shown) used when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the second Bonus state, and (h) managed by the sub control board 400. The third bonus state effect determination table (not shown) used when the state is the third bonus state, and (i) the first used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the first fall standby state. A fall standby state effect determination table (not shown) and (j) when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is an ART ready state. An ART preparation state effect determination table (not shown), and (k) an ART state effect determination table (not shown) used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the ART state; ) A first added sign state effect determination table (not shown) used when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the first add sign state, and (m) the state managed by the sub control board 400. A first addition preparation state effect determination table (not shown) used in the case of the first addition preparation state, and (n) a first state used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the first addition state. An added state production determination table (not shown) and (o) a second fall standby state performance used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the second fall standby state. An outgoing decision table (not shown), and (p) a second added sign state effect determining table (not shown) used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the second added sign state; q) a second addition preparation state effect determination table (not shown) used when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the second addition preparation state, and (r) the state managed by the sub control board 400 Is the second added state effect determination table (not shown) used when the second added state is in the second added state, and (s) the third used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the third fall standby state. A fall standby state effect determination table (not shown) and (t) a fourth fall standby state effect determination table used when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the fourth fall standby state. (Not shown) is provided.

(Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table)
Next, the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table includes (a) a Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table (normal state) (see FIG. 25A) for drawing whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state in the normal state. b) Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (chance precursor state) (see FIG. 25B) for drawing whether to shift to the Bonus preparation state in the chance precursor state, and (c) Bonus in the chance state. A Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table (chance state) (see FIG. 25C) for drawing whether to shift to the preparation state is provided.

(Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table (normal state))
The Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table (normal state) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is provided for lottery of whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state in the normal state. Here, in the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (normal state), a winning combination and a lottery value corresponding to the winning combination are defined. For example, when “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination, it is determined to shift to the Bonus ready state with a probability of “3276/65536”.

(Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (predicting chance state))
The Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (chance precursor state) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is provided for lottery of whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state in the chance precursor state. Here, in the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (chance precursor state), a winning combination and a lottery value corresponding to the winning combination are defined. For example, when “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination, it is determined to shift to the Bonus ready state with a probability of “3276/65536”.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (normal state) and the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (chance sign state) have the same values as the lottery values defined according to each winning combination. Although it is defined, it is not limited to this, and is defined in the lottery value defined in the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (normal state) and the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (chance precursor state). The lottery value can be set as appropriate.

(Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table (chance state))
The Bonus preparation state transfer lottery table (chance state) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is provided for drawing in the chance state whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state. Here, in the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (chance state), a winning combination and a lottery value corresponding to the winning combination are defined. For example, when “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination, it is determined to shift to the Bonus ready state with a probability of “6554/65536”.

  Here, comparing the case where a predetermined winning combination is determined in the chance state and the case where the predetermined winning combination is determined in the normal state, the case where the predetermined winning combination is determined in the chance state However, it is defined that the probability of shifting to the Bonus ready state is high. In the chance state, even when “push order bell” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, a lottery is performed to determine whether or not to enter the bonus preparation state, while the normal state or chance In the precursor state, when “push order bell” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process to be described later, the lottery of whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state is not performed. Therefore, it can be said that the chance state has a higher probability of shifting to the Bonus ready state than the normal state or the chance precursor state.

(Bonus state distribution lottery table)
Next, the Bonus state distribution lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The Bonus state distribution lottery table includes: (a) a Bonus state distribution lottery table (normal state) (see FIG. 26A) that is referred to when it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state in the normal state. (B) Bonus state distribution lottery table (chance precursor state) (see FIG. 26 (B)) that is referred to when it is decided to shift to the Bonus ready state in the chance precursor state (see FIG. 26 (B)), and (c) chance. In the state, there is provided a Bonus state distribution lottery table (chance state) (see FIG. 26C) that is referred to when it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state.

(Bonus state distribution lottery table (normal state))
The Bonus state distribution lottery table (normal state) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and when it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state in the normal state, the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, and the third Bonus It is provided to determine any of the waiting states. Here, the Bonus state distribution lottery table (normal state) includes a lottery value determined to be waiting for the first Bonus, a lottery value determined to be waiting for the second Bonus, and a lottery value determined to be waiting for the third Bonus. It is defined for each winning role that triggered the transition to the ready state. For example, in the normal state, when “watermelon” is determined by an internal lottery process to be described later and it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state, the waiting for the first Bonus is determined with a probability of “24852/65536” The waiting for the second Bonus is determined with a probability of “39858/65536”, and the waiting for the third Bonus is determined with a probability of “826/65536”.

  In the following description, the waiting for the first Bonus, the waiting for the second Bonus, and the waiting for the third Bonus are collectively referred to as “waiting for the Bonus”.

(Bonus status distribution lottery table (predicting chance status))
The Bonus state distribution lottery table (chance precursor state) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and when it is determined to shift to the Bonus ready state in the chance precursor state, the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, It is provided to determine any of the third Bonus waiting. Here, the Bonus state distribution lottery table (chance predictor state) includes a lottery value determined to be waiting for the first Bonus, a lottery value determined to be waiting for the second Bonus, and a lottery value determined to be waiting for the third Bonus. It is defined for each winning combination that triggered the transition to the Bonus ready state. For example, when “watermelon” is determined by the internal lottery process described later in the sign of chance and it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state, the waiting for the first Bonus is determined with a probability of “24852/65536”. , Waiting for the second Bonus is determined with a probability of “39858/65536”, and waiting for the third Bonus is determined with a probability of “826/65536”.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the Bonus state distribution lottery table (normal state) and the Bonus state distribution lottery table (chance precursor state) have the same values as the lottery values defined according to each winning combination. Although defined, it is not limited to this, and is defined in the lottery values defined in the Bonus state distribution lottery table (normal state) and the Bonus state distribution lottery table (chance precursor state). The lottery value can be set as appropriate.

(Bonus state distribution lottery table (chance state))
The Bonus state distribution lottery table (chance state) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and when it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state in the chance state, the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, and the third Bonus It is provided to determine any of the waiting states. Here, the Bonus state distribution lottery table (chance state) includes a lottery value determined to be waiting for the first Bonus, a lottery value determined to be waiting for the second Bonus, and a lottery value determined to be waiting for the third Bonus. It is defined for each winning role that triggered the transition to the ready state. For example, in the chance state, when the “push order bell” is determined by the internal lottery process described later and it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state, the waiting for the first Bonus is determined with a probability of “35768/65536”. Then, waiting for the second Bonus is determined with a probability of “29749/65536”, and waiting for the third Bonus is determined with a probability of “19/65536”.

(Predictor game number determination table)
Next, the precursor game number determination table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The precursor game number determination table is (a) a Bonus precursor game number determination table for determining the number of games to be played in the Bonus precursor state when it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state (FIG. 27 ( A) see) and (b) a chance precursor game number determination table for determining the number of games to be played in the chance precursor state when it is determined to shift to the chance state in the normal state (see FIG. 27 (B)), and (c) a first number for determining the number of games to be played in the first additional sign state when it is determined to shift to the first additional state in the ART state. When the sign of the number of signs of addition sign-up (see FIG. 27C) and (d) the ART state is determined to shift to the second addition state, Allowed and a second plus aura game number determination table for determining the number of games to be able to game with aura state (see FIG. 27 (D)).

(Bonus precursor game number determination table)
The Bonus precursor game number determination table is provided in the sub ROM 402. (a) In the normal state, as a result of performing the lottery using the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (normal state) (see FIG. 25A), When it is determined to shift to the Bonus ready state, (b) in the chance precursor state, a lottery is performed using the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (chance precursor state) (see FIG. 25B). When it is determined to shift to the preparation state, it is provided to determine the number of games until the transition to the Bonus preparation state. Here, in the Bonus precursor game number determination table, a lottery value of the Bonus precursor game number is defined for each winning combination determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state. For example, when “watermelon” is determined by an internal lottery process to be described later and it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state, “5” game is determined as the number of Bonus precursor games with a probability of “49152/65536”. “10” game is determined as the number of Bonus precursor games with the probability of “8192/65536”, and “15” game is determined as the number of Bonus precursor games with the probability of “8192/65536”. The determined number of Bonus precursor games is set to the value of a Bonus precursor state game number counter, which will be described later, provided in the sub-RAM 403.

(Chance precursor game number determination table)
The chance sign game number determination table is provided in the sub ROM 402. In the normal state, as a result of lottery using a chance state shift lottery table (see FIG. 28) described later, it is determined to shift to the chance state. Is provided to determine the number of games until the chance state is entered. Here, the chance precursor game number determination table defines a lottery value of the number of chance precursor games for each winning combination determined to shift to the chance state. For example, when “watermelon” is determined by an internal lottery process described later and it is determined to shift to the chance state, “3” game is determined as the number of chance precursor games with the probability of “49152/65536” The game number “6” is determined as the chance precursor game number with the probability of “8192/65536”, and the game number “9” is determined as the chance precursor game number with the probability of “8192/65536”. The determined chance precursor game number is set to a value of a chance precursor state game number counter, which will be described later, provided in the sub-RAM 403.

(First extra sign game number determination table)
The first extra sign game number determination table is provided in the sub ROM 402. As a result of lottery using the first extra state transition lottery table (see FIG. 34A) described later in the ART state, When it is determined to shift to the added state, it is provided to determine the number of games until the shift to the first added state. Here, in the first extra sign game number determination table, a lottery value of the first extra sign game number is defined for each winning combination determined to shift to the first extra state. For example, if “watermelon” is determined by the internal lottery process described later and it is determined to shift to the first additional state, “2” game is set as the first additional harbinger game number with a probability of “32768/65536”. Is determined, and “4” games are determined as the number of first extra sign games with a probability of “32768/65536”. Note that the determined first extra sign game number is set to a value of a first extra sign state game number counter, which will be described later, provided in the sub-RAM 403.

(Second extra sign game number determination table)
The second extra sign game number determination table is provided in the sub ROM 402. As a result of lottery using the second extra state transition lottery table (see FIG. 34B) described later in the ART state, When it is determined to shift to the added state, it is provided for determining the number of games until shifting to the second added state. Here, the lottery value of the number of second extra sign game is defined for each winning combination determined to shift to the second extra state in the second extra sign game number determination table. For example, when “middle stage cherry” is determined by the internal lottery process to be described later and it is determined to shift to the second added state, “2” is set as the number of second added precursor games with a probability of “16384/65536”. The game is determined, the game number “4” is determined as the number of the second sign-on game with the probability of “16384/65536”, and the game number “6” is determined as the number of the second sign-up game with the probability of “16384/65536”. , “8” games are determined as the number of second sign-on games with the probability of “16384/65536”. It should be noted that the determined second extra sign game number is set to a value of a later-described second extra sign state game number counter provided in the sub-RAM 403.

(Chance state transition lottery table)
Next, the chance state transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The chance state transition lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 402 and is provided for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the chance state in the normal state. Specifically, in the chance state transfer lottery table, lottery values that will shift to the chance state for each winning combination are defined. For example, when “watermelon” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, it is determined to shift to the chance state with a probability of “3276/65536”.

(Fake game number determination table)
Next, the fake game number determination table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The fake game number determination table (a) in the normal state, the normal state fake game number determination table for determining the number of games in which the production is expected to shift to the Bonus preparation state (see FIG. 29A). ) And (b) in the ART state, the ART state fake game number determination table (FIG. 29 (FIG. 29)) for determining the number of games in which the production is expected to shift to the first additional state or the second additional state. B)).

(Normal Fake Game Number Determination Table)
The normal state fake game number determination table is provided in the sub ROM 402. As a result of performing lottery using the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (normal state) (see FIG. 25A) in the normal state, the bonus is determined. It is provided to determine the number of games in which an effect is expected to make a transition to the Bonus preparation state when it is not determined to enter the preparation state. Here, in the normal state fake game number determination table, a lottery value of the number of fake precursor games is defined for each winning combination. For example, if “watermelon” is determined by an internal lottery process to be described later and it is not determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state, “5” game is determined as the number of fake precursor games with a probability of “49152/65536” Then, “10” games are determined as the number of fake omens with the probability of “8192/65536”, and “15” games are determined as the number of precluded games with the probability of “8192/65536”. Note that the determined number of fake omen games is set to a value of a fake game number counter (described later) provided in the sub RAM 403.

(Art state fake game number determination table)
The ART state fake game number determination table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and in the ART state, a first added state transition lottery table (see FIG. 34A) described later and a second added state transition lottery table described later (see FIG. 34A). As a result of performing the lottery using FIG. 34 (B), when it is not determined to shift to the first added state and the second added state, the state shifts to the first added state or the second added state. It is provided to determine the number of games in which an effect that is expected to be performed is performed. Here, in the ART state fake game number determination table, a lottery value of the number of ART state fake games is defined for each winning combination. For example, if “watermelon” is determined by the internal lottery process to be described later and it is not determined to shift to the first added state and the second added state, the fake for the ART state has a probability of “49152/65536”. “1” game is determined as the number of games, “3” game is determined as the number of ART state fake precursor games with the probability of “8192/65536”, and the number of fake precursor games for ART state with the probability of “8192/65536” As a result, “5” game is determined. The determined ART state fake predictive game number is set to the value of an ART state fake game number counter, which will be described later, provided in the sub-RAM 403.

(Promotional lottery table)
Next, the promotion lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The promotion lottery table is: (a) a promotion lottery table (waiting for the first Bonus) used for lottery whether to promote during the second Bonus standby or the third Bonus standby during the first Bonus standby (FIG. 30 ( A) (refer to FIG. 30 (B)), and (b) during the second Bonus standby, the promotion lottery table (second Bonus standby) used when drawing whether or not to promote during the third Bonus standby (see FIG. 30 (B)). I have.

(Promotional lottery table (waiting for 1st Bonus))
The promotion lottery table (waiting for the first Bonus) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is promoted while waiting for the second Bonus or waiting for the third Bonus when the Bonus precursor state or the Bonus preparation state is waiting for the first Bonus. It is provided to draw whether or not to make it. Specifically, a lottery value that is promoted during the second Bonus standby and a lottery value that is promoted during the third Bonus standby are defined for each winning combination in the promotion lottery table (while waiting for the first Bonus). For example, when “weak cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the player is promoted during the second Bonus standby with a probability of “12785/65536”, and the third Bonus with a probability of “24/65536”. You will be promoted while waiting.

(Promotional lottery table (waiting for 2nd Bonus))
The promotion lottery table (waiting for the second Bonus) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and in the Bonus precursor state or the Bonus ready state, when the second Bonus is waiting, whether or not to promote during the third Bonus waiting is determined by lottery. Is provided to do. Specifically, a lottery value to be promoted during the third Bonus standby is defined for each winning combination in the promotion lottery table (while waiting for the second Bonus). For example, when “weak cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, the player is promoted during the third Bonus standby with a probability of “24/65536”.

  In addition, during the first Bonus standby, when one of the symbol combinations related to “Bonus Replay” is displayed on the active line, the state shifts to the first Bonus state. Further, when any of the symbol combinations related to “Bonus Replay” is displayed on the active line while waiting for the second Bonus, the state shifts to the second Bonus state. When any of the symbol combinations related to “Bonus Replay” is displayed on the active line while waiting for the third Bonus, the state is shifted to the third Bonus state. For this reason, the waiting time for the third Bonus is most advantageous for the player compared to the waiting time for the first Bonus and the waiting time for the second Bonus. Therefore, the promotion lottery is not performed while waiting for the third Bonus.

(ART preparation state transfer lottery table)
Next, the ART preparation state transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The ART ready state transition lottery table is (a) the first Bonus state ART ready state transition lottery table used in the first Bonus state to determine whether to shift to the ART ready state (see FIG. 31A). ) And (b) a second Bonus state ART preparation state transition lottery table (see FIG. 31B) used when performing a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the ART preparation state in the second Bonus state. .

(First Bonus state ART preparation state transition lottery table)
The first Bonus state ART preparation state transition lottery table is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is provided for performing a lottery on whether or not to shift to the ART preparation state in the first Bonus state. Specifically, the lottery value for shifting to the ART ready state for each winning combination is defined in the first Bonus state ART ready state transition lottery table. For example, when “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination, it is determined to shift to the ART ready state with a probability of “4096/65536”.

(Second Bonus state ART preparation state transition lottery table)
The second Bonus state ART preparation state transition lottery table is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is provided for performing a lottery on whether or not to shift to the ART preparation state in the second Bonus state. Specifically, in the second bonus state ART ready state transition lottery table, a lottery value that shifts to the ART ready state for each winning combination is defined. For example, when “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination, it is determined to shift to the ART ready state with a probability of “8192/65536”.

(ART state number of games added lottery table)
Next, based on FIG. 32, the ART state game number addition lottery table will be described.

  The ART state number-of-games extra lottery table is: (a) In the third Bonus state, an ART state number-of-games extra lottery table (No. 1) used when performing a lottery to determine whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the ART state. (3 Bonus state) (see FIG. 32 (A)) and (b) In the ART ready state, or in the ART state used when performing a lottery to determine whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the ART state. The number of games added lottery table (ART ready state / ART state) (see FIG. 32B), and (c) the number of games that can be played in the ART state in the first additional sign state and the second additional sign state The number of ART state games used in the lottery to determine whether or not to be added, and a lottery table (precursor status) (see FIG. 32C), and (d) first upper In the preparation state or the second addition preparation state, the ART state number-of-games extra lottery table (addition preparation state) used when the lottery of whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the ART state is performed (FIG. 32). (See (D)), and (e) In the first added state, an ART state number-of-games addition lottery table (first added amount) used when performing a lottery to determine whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the ART state. (State) (see FIG. 32E) and (f) in the second added state, the number of games for the ART state used in the lottery to determine whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the ART state. Table (second added state) (see FIG. 32F) and (g) used in lottery to determine whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the ART state in the second fall standby state. Whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the ART state in the ART state game number addition lottery table (second fall standby state) (see FIG. 32G) and (h) the third fall standby state A lottery table (third fall waiting state) (see FIG. 32 (H)) added to the number of ART state games used when the lottery is performed.

(ART state game number extra lottery table (3rd Bonus state))
The number of games for ART state addition lottery table (third Bonus state) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and after the third Bonus state ends, is the number of games that can be played in the ART state transferred through the ART ready state added? It is provided to make a lottery of no. Specifically, in the ART state game number addition lottery table (third Bonus state), a lottery value for the number of additional games is defined for each winning combination. For example, when “middle cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, “50” games are determined as the number of additional games with the probability of “32768/65536”, and “16384/65536” “100” game is determined as the number of additional games with probability, “200” game is determined as the number of additional games with probability of “8192/65536”, and “300” games as the number of additional games with probability of “8192/65536” Will be determined.

(Number of games for ART state addition lottery table (ART preparation state / ART state))
The number of games for ART state addition lottery table (ART ready state / ART state) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process described later in the ART ready state or ART state, It is provided for performing a lottery on whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state. Specifically, the lottery table for adding the number of games for ART state (ART preparation state / ART state) defines a lottery value for the number of additional games for each winning combination. For example, when “middle cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, “50” games are determined as the number of additional games with the probability of “32768/65536”, and “16384/65536” “100” game is determined as the number of additional games with probability, “200” game is determined as the number of additional games with probability of “8192/65536”, and “300” games as the number of additional games with probability of “8192/65536” Will be determined.

(Art state game number extra lottery table (precursor extra state))
The ART state number-of-games extra lottery table (preliminary sign state) is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process described later in the first extra sign state and the second extra sign state. Thus, it is provided for performing a lottery on whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state. Specifically, in the ART state game number extra lottery table (preliminary sign state), the lottery value of the extra game number is defined for each winning combination. For example, when “middle cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, “50” games are determined as the number of additional games with the probability of “32768/65536”, and “16384/65536” “100” game is determined as the number of additional games with probability, “200” game is determined as the number of additional games with probability of “8192/65536”, and “300” games as the number of additional games with probability of “8192/65536” Will be determined.

(Number of games for ART state addition lottery table (addition preparation state))
The ART state number-of-games extra lottery table (upper preparation state) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process described later in the first extra preparation state and the second extra preparation state. Thus, it is provided for performing a lottery on whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state. Specifically, in the ART state game number addition lottery table (addition preparation state), a lottery value for the number of additional games is defined for each winning combination. For example, when “middle cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, “50” games are determined as the number of additional games with the probability of “32768/65536”, and “16384/65536” “100” game is determined as the number of additional games with probability, “200” game is determined as the number of additional games with probability of “8192/65536”, and “300” games as the number of additional games with probability of “8192/65536” Will be determined.

(ART state game number extra lottery table (first extra state))
The number-of-arts game extra lottery table (first extra state) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and in the first extra state, games can be played in the ART state based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process described later. It is provided for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to increase the number of games. Specifically, in the ART state game number extra lottery table (first extra state), the lottery value of the extra game number is defined for each winning combination. For example, when “middle stage cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, “100” game is determined as the number of additional games with the probability of “32768/65536”, and “16384/65536” The “200” game is determined as the number of additional games with probability, and the “300” game is determined as the number of additional games with the probability of “16384/65536”.

(ART state game number extra lottery table (second extra state))
The ART state game number extra lottery table (second extra state) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and in the second extra state, it is possible to play in the ART state based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process described later. It is provided for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to increase the number of games. Specifically, in the ART state game number extra lottery table (second extra state), the lottery value of the extra game number is defined for each winning combination. For example, when “middle stage cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, “100” game is determined as the number of additional games with the probability of “16384/65536”, and “16384/65536” The “200” game is determined as the number of additional games by the probability, and the “300” game is determined as the additional number of games at the probability of “32768/65536”.

(ART state number of games added lottery table (second fall standby state))
The number of games for ART state addition lottery table (second fall standby state) is provided in the sub ROM 402, and in the ART state based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process described later in the second fall standby state. It is provided for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played. Specifically, in the ART state game number addition lottery table (second fall standby state), a lottery value for the number of additional games is defined for each winning combination. For example, when “middle cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, “50” games are determined as the number of additional games with the probability of “32768/65536”, and “16384/65536” “100” game is determined as the number of additional games with probability, “200” game is determined as the number of additional games with probability of “8192/65536”, and “300” games as the number of additional games with probability of “8192/65536” Will be determined.

(ART state number of games added lottery table (third fall standby state))
The number of games for ART state addition lottery table (third fall standby state) is provided in the sub ROM 402. In the third fall standby state, in the ART state based on the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process described later. It is provided for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played. Specifically, in the ART state game number addition lottery table (third fall standby state), a lottery value for the number of additional games is defined for each winning combination. For example, when “middle cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, “50” games are determined as the number of additional games with the probability of “32768/65536”, and “16384/65536” “100” game is determined as the number of additional games with probability, “200” game is determined as the number of additional games with probability of “8192/65536”, and “300” games as the number of additional games with probability of “8192/65536” Will be determined.

(Withdrawal lottery table)
Next, the pull-back lottery table will be described based on FIG.

  The pull-back lottery table is (a) a first lottery standby state pull-out lottery table (see FIG. 33A) that is used when performing a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the ART ready state in the first roll-down standby state. ) And (b) in the fourth fall standby state, a fourth fall standby state pull-out lottery table (see FIG. 33 (B)) used when performing a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the ART state is provided. Yes.

(Retraction lottery table for the first fall standby state)
The first fall standby state pull-out lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and is provided for performing a lottery on whether or not to shift to the ART preparation state in the first fall standby state. Specifically, in the first fall standby state withdrawal lottery table, a lottery value that will shift to the ART ready state is defined for each winning combination. For example, when “successful play” is determined as the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, it is determined to shift to the ART preparation state with a probability of “4096/65536”.

(Fourth lottery table for the 4th falling standby state)
The fourth fall standby state pull-out lottery table is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is provided for performing a lottery on whether or not to shift to the ART state in the fourth fall standby state. Specifically, in the fourth falling standby state withdrawal lottery table, a lottery value that will shift to the ART state is defined for each winning combination. For example, when “successful play” is determined as a winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, it is determined to shift to the ART state with a probability of “8192/65536”.

(Additional state transfer lottery table)
Next, the added state transition lottery table will be described with reference to FIG.

  The added state transition lottery table includes (a) a first added state transition lottery table (see FIG. 34 (A)) used when performing a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the first added state, and (b) second. A second added state transition lottery table (see FIG. 34B) used when performing a lottery to determine whether or not to shift to the added state is provided.

(First addition state transition lottery table)
The first added state transition lottery table is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is provided for performing a lottery on whether or not to shift to the first added state in the ART state. Specifically, in the first added state transition lottery table, a lottery value that will shift to the first added state is defined for each winning combination. For example, when “strong cherry” is determined as the winning combination by an internal lottery process described later, it is determined to shift to the first added state with a probability of “8192/65536”.

(Second addition state transition lottery table)
The second added state transition lottery table is provided in the sub-ROM 402, and is provided for performing a lottery on whether or not to shift to the second added state in the ART state. Specifically, in the second added state transition lottery table, a lottery value that will shift to the second added state is defined for each winning combination. For example, when “middle stage cherry” is determined as the winning combination by the internal lottery process described later, it is determined to shift to the second added state with a probability of “32768/65536”.

(Continuous production execution lottery table)
Next, the continuous effect execution lottery table will be described based on FIG.

  The continuous performance execution lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 402, and when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the ART state, the lottery determines whether or not to execute the continuous performance before the end of the ART state. It is provided for. Specifically, in the continuous performance execution lottery table, a winning combination and a lottery value corresponding to the winning combination are defined. For example, when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the ART state and “normal replay” is determined as the winning combination, it is determined to execute the continuous effect with the probability of “327/65536”. Is done.

(Number of sets added lottery table)
Next, the lottery table with the number of sets added will be described with reference to FIG.

  The set number addition lottery table is provided in the sub-ROM 402. When the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the ART state, the ART state is finished, and after shifting to the fourth fall state, the ART state is again established. It is provided to determine whether or not to shift to. Specifically, the winning combination and a lottery value corresponding to the winning combination are defined in the lottery table with the number of sets. For example, when “watermelon” is determined as the winning combination, the winning combination is “2596/65536”. As will be described in detail later, the sub CPU 401 performs lottery using the lottery table with the set number added when the continuous performance execution flag is ON.

(Continuous production change lottery table)
Next, the continuous effect change lottery table will be described based on FIG.

  The continuous effect change lottery table is provided in the sub ROM 402 and is provided for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to change the continuous effect that is executed when the value of the ART state game number counter becomes “3”. It has been. Specifically, the continuous effect change lottery table defines the lottery value of the continuous effect that is executed when the value of the ART state game number counter becomes “3” in accordance with the winning combination.

  Here, the continuous effect change lottery table is a case where the continuous effect executed when the value of the ART state game number counter is “3” is “enemy character A loss”, and is added to the set number described later. In the lottery process, the enemy character A losing continuous effect change lottery table (set number additional winning flag = ON) (see FIG. 37A) and the ART state are referenced when the set number additional winning flag is ON. When the continuous effect executed when the value of the game number counter is “3” is “enemy character A loses”, and the set number extra winning flag is OFF by the set number extra lottery process described later The enemy character A losing continuous effect change lottery table (set number addition winning flag = OFF) (see FIG. 37B) is provided.

  Although not shown, the enemy character A win-time continuous effect change is referred to when the continuous effect executed when the value of the ART state game number counter is “3” is “enemy character A win”. The lottery table and the continuous effect change lottery table for the resurrection of the enemy character A that is referred to when the continuous effect executed when the value of the ART state game number counter is “3” is “enemy character A resurrection”. When the value of the ART state game number counter is “3”, the continuous effect executed is “enemy character B loss”, and the set number extra lottery is performed by the set number extra lottery process described later. When the flag is ON, the enemy character B losing continuous production change lottery table (set number addition winning flag = ON) and the value of the ART state game number counter are “3”. When the enemy character B loses, which is referred to when the set number addition winning flag is OFF by the set number addition lottery process to be described later, the continuous effect that is executed in the case of the Refers to the case where the continuous effect executed when the value of the consecutive effect change lottery table (the number of sets added winning flag = OFF) and the ART state game number counter is “3” is “enemy character B wins” This is referred to when the enemy character B wins continuous effect change lottery table and the continuous effect executed when the value of the ART state game number counter is “3” is “enemy character B revival”. The continuous effect executed when the value of the continuous effect change lottery table for the resurrection of the enemy character B and the ART state game number counter is “3” is “enemy character C negative In the case of the enemy character C losing continuous effect change lottery table (set number additional winning flag = ON), which is referred to when the set number additional winning flag is ON by a set number additional lottery process described later. When the value of the ART state game number counter is “3”, the continuous effect is “enemy character C losing”, and the set number extra winning flag is set by the set number extra lottery process described later. This is executed when the value of the consecutive effect change lottery table for the losing enemy character C (set number addition winning flag = OFF) and the ART state game number counter which are referred to when “OFF” is “3”. The enemy character C winning continuous effect changing lottery table and the value of the ART state game number counter which are referred to when the continuous effect is “enemy character C win” There is provided an enemy character C resurrection continuous effect change lottery table that is referred to when the continuous effect executed when “3” is “enemy character C resurrection”.

  Here, in this embodiment, the continuous production change lottery table always includes “Enemy character A win”, “Enemy character B win”, “Enemy character C win”, “ The lottery value is defined so that any one of “Enemy character A revival”, “Enemy character B revival”, “Enemy character C revival”, and “Enemy character D win” is executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the continuous effect change lottery table is always “enemy character A losing”, “enemy character B losing”, or “enemy character C losing” when the number of sets added and the winning flag is OFF. The lottery value is defined so that the above is executed.

(Enemy characters that compete in continuous production)
Here, the enemy characters that will compete in the continuous performance will be described. In the present embodiment, an enemy character A, an enemy character B, an enemy character C, and an enemy character D are provided as enemy characters that compete in the continuous performance.

(Enemy character A)
The enemy character A is an opponent who is determined first when it is determined to execute the continuous performance. Here, in the continuous effect change lottery table, the lottery value is defined so that the enemy character A has a lower victory expectation in the continuous effect than the other enemy characters.

(Enemy character B)
The enemy character B is an opponent who has a higher degree of victory expectation than the enemy character A in the continuous performance. Specifically, in the continuous effect change lottery table, the enemy character B has a lottery value defined so that the victory expectation in the continuous effect is lower than the enemy character C and the enemy character D.

(Enemy character C)
The enemy character C is an opponent who has a higher expectation of victory than the enemy character A and the enemy character B in the continuous performance. Specifically, in the continuous effect change lottery table, the enemy character C has a lottery value defined so that the expected victory degree in the continuous effect is lower than the enemy character D.

(Enemy character D)
The enemy character D is an opponent with the highest expectation of victory in the continuous performance. Specifically, in the continuous effect change lottery table, the lottery value is defined so that the enemy character D is selected only when winning.

(Specific example of lottery using continuous production change lottery table)
Here, a specific example of the lottery using the continuous production change lottery table will be described.

  In the case where it is determined to perform a continuous production to be defeated by the enemy character A, when “watermelon play” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, and a lottery using the lottery table is added, The winning flag, which will be described later, is set ON. In this case, the probability that the opponent who fights in the continuous performance is changed from the enemy character A to the enemy character B is “12288/65536”. This “12288/65536” is a value obtained by adding the lottery value “4096/65536” for resurrection of the enemy character B to the lottery value “8192/65536” for the enemy character B win.

  On the other hand, when it is decided to execute a continuous production to be defeated by the enemy character A, “watermelon play” is determined by an internal lottery process described later, and the lottery using the lottery table added later is not selected. In the case where the winning flag with the set number, which will be described later, remains OFF, the probability that the opponent in the continuous production will be changed from the enemy character A to the enemy character B is “2685/65536”.

  For this reason, when the later-described set number additional winning flag is turned ON, the probability “12288/65536” of changing from the enemy character A to the enemy character B and the later-described set number additional winning flag remain OFF. In this case, when the probability “2685/65536” of changing from the enemy character A to the enemy character B is compared, it is defined that the lottery value is higher when the later-described set number addition winning flag is ON. ing. Therefore, when the opponent of the continuous performance is changed from the enemy character A to the enemy character B, the player expects that the winning flag is turned on after adding the number of sets described later. Interest is improved.

  Similarly, when the opponent of the continuous performance is changed to the enemy character C, it is further expected that the winning flag will be turned on after adding the set number to be described later than when the opponent is changed to the enemy character B. As a result, interest in games is improved.

(Program start processing by the main control board 300)
Next, a program start process performed by the main control board 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The program start process is a process performed based on the fact that the power switch 201sw is turned on.

(Step S1)
In step S <b> 1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not power is interrupted. Specifically, when power is supplied to the gaming machine 1, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the gaming machine 1 is in a power interruption state, and when the power is not supplied to the gaming machine 1. In this case, a process for determining whether or not the gaming machine 1 is cut off by the backup power source is performed. If it is determined that the power is interrupted (step S1 = Yes), the process of step S1 is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if it is determined that the power is not interrupted (step S1 = No), the process proceeds to step S2.

(Step S2)
In step S2, the main CPU 301 performs an initial setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets a table address for setting the internal register of the gaming machine 1, and performs a process of setting the register address based on the table. Then, when the process of step S2 ends, the process proceeds to step S3.

(Step S3)
In step S3, the main CPU 301 performs a RAM checksum calculation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 calculates the checksum of the main RAM 303, and when the calculation is completed, performs processing for setting the checksum of the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S3 ends, the process proceeds to step S4.

(Step S4)
In step S4, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not the setting change key switch is ON. In the present embodiment, the setting change key switch 49sw is turned on when the setting change key (not shown) is inserted into the setting change key hole 48 and rotated by a predetermined angle. Therefore, in step S4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the setting change key (not shown) is rotated by a predetermined angle with the setting change key inserted in the setting change key hole 48. When it is determined that the setting change key switch is ON (step S4 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S5, and when it is determined that the setting change key switch is OFF (step S4). = No), the processing shifts to a power failure recovery process for restoring the value of the register saved before power interruption and the value of the saved stack pointer.

  When the power interruption recovery process is completed, the game machine 1 returns to the state when the power is turned off.

(Step S5)
In step S5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the door opening / closing sensor is ON. In the present embodiment, a door key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole 5 and rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle, and the front door 3 is opened by a predetermined angle or more, whereby the door opening / closing sensor 17s is turned on. It becomes. Therefore, in step S5, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not a door key (not shown) is inserted into the keyhole 5 and rotated clockwise by a predetermined angle, and the front door 3 is opened at a predetermined angle or more. Processing to determine is performed. If it is determined that the door opening / closing sensor is ON (step S5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S7, and if it is determined that the door opening / closing sensor is OFF (step S5 = No). ), The process proceeds to step S6.

(Step S6)
In step S6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a setting change device operation abnormality flag. Specifically, when the setting change key switch 49sw is ON (step S4 = Yes) and the door opening / closing sensor 17s is OFF (step S5 = No), the front door 3 is not opened more than a predetermined angle. Nevertheless, it is rotated by a predetermined angle with the setting change key inserted. For this reason, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a setting change device operation abnormality flag in a setting change device operation abnormality flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. And when the process of step S6 is complete | finished, a process is transfered to the electric power interruption return process mentioned above.

(Step S7)
In step S7, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a setting change start command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the setting change start command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the setting change start command to the sub-control board 400. I do. Here, the “setting change start command” is a command having information or the like indicating that the gaming machine 1 is turned on and starts changing the setting value. Then, when the process of step S7 ends, the process proceeds to step S8.

(Step S8)
In step S8, the main CPU 301 performs a setting value change process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 acquires the current set value, determines whether or not the range of the set value is normal, and when the determination result is normal, the stored number indicator 28, Processing for displaying the current set value on the setting display unit 44 is performed. On the other hand, when the above determination result is not normal, processing for setting the initial setting value of the setting value in the setting value storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. The main CPU 301 performs a setting value switching process based on the detection of the operation of the setting change button 45 by the setting change switch 45sw, and also detects that the operation of the start lever 10 is detected by the start switch 10sw. Based on this, the setting value is determined, and the setting value is stored in the main RAM 303 when it is detected that the setting changing key rotated by a predetermined angle has been rotated to an angle at which it can be inserted and removed. Processing to store in the set value storage area provided is performed. Then, when the process of step S8 ends, the process proceeds to step S9.

(Step S9)
In step S9, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a setting change end command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the setting change end command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the setting change end command to the sub-control board 400. I do. Here, the “setting change end command” is a command having information indicating that the setting value has been changed and information related to the changed setting value. Then, when the process of step S9 ends, the process proceeds to step S10.

(Step S10)
In step S10, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the door opening / closing sensor is OFF. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the door opening / closing sensor 17s is OFF. If it is determined that the door opening / closing sensor is OFF (step S10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S11, and if it is determined that the door opening / closing sensor is not OFF (step S10 = No). ), The process proceeds to step S12.

(Step S11)
In step S11, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a door close command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the door close command in an effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the door close command to the sub-control board 400. . Here, the “door close command” is a command having information indicating that the front door 3 is closed. Then, when the process of step S11 ends, the process proceeds to the main loop process (see FIG. 39).

(Step S12)
In step S12, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a door open command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the door open command in an effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the door open command to the sub-control board 400. . Here, the “door open command” is a command having information indicating that the front door 3 is open. Then, when the process of step S12 ends, the process proceeds to the main loop process (see FIG. 39).

(Main loop processing by the main control board 300)
Next, the main loop process performed by the main control board 300 will be described based on FIG.

(Step S101)
In step S101, the main CPU 301 performs an initialization process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the stack pointer, sets the initialization start address and the initialization end address of the main RAM 303, and then initializes from the initialization start address to the initialization end address area of the main RAM 303. Processing for initializing the area is performed. Then, when the process of step S101 ends, the process proceeds to step S102.

(Step S102)
In step S102, the main CPU 301 performs a game start management process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303, the value of the stop control number storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and the press reference position storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Performs processing to clear the value. Further, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the operable state flag corresponding to the BET button 7 and the MAXBET button 8 in the operable state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S102 ends, the process proceeds to step S103.

(Step S103)
In step S103, the main CPU 301 performs medal acceptance start processing. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of automatically inserting medals when a later-described re-game operating flag is ON. Then, when the process of step S103 ends, the process proceeds to step S104.

(Step S104)
In step S104, the main CPU 301 performs a setting value confirmation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the setting value stored in the setting value storage area provided in the main RAM 303 when the medal has not been inserted and the setting change key switch 49sw is ON. A process of displaying the value on the setting display unit 44 is performed. Then, when the process of step S104 ends, the process proceeds to step S105.

(Step S105)
In step S105, the main CPU 301 performs medal management processing. In this process, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not a medal is inserted into the medal slot 6 when a later-described re-game operation flag is not ON, and when a medal is inserted into the medal slot 6. The process of adding the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303, whether or not the operation of the BET button 7 or the MAXBET button 8 is detected, and the operation of the BET button 7 or the MAXBET button 8 are detected. When it is detected, it is determined whether or not the process of adding the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303, the operation of the settlement button 9 is detected, and the operation of the settlement button 9 is detected. A process of returning the stored medals to the player is performed. Then, when the process of step S105 ends, the process proceeds to step S106.

(Step S106)
In step S <b> 106, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the insertion number counter is “3”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the insertion number counter provided in the main RAM 303 has become “3” by the medal acceptance start process in step S103 and the medal management process in step S105. Process. If it is determined that the value of the inserted number counter is “3” (step S106 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S107, and it is determined that the value of the inserted number counter is not “3”. In that case (step S106 = No), the process proceeds to step S104.

(Step S107)
In step S107, the main CPU 301 performs a start lever check process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the start switch 10sw is ON. Then, when the process of step S107 ends, the process proceeds to step S108.

(Step S108)
In step S108, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not the start switch is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the start switch 10sw is ON. If it is determined that the start switch is ON (step S108 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109. If it is determined that the start switch is not ON (step S108 = No), The process proceeds to step S104.

(Step S109)
In step S109, the main CPU 301 performs an internal lottery process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining a winning combination by lottery. Then, when the process of step S109 ends, the process proceeds to step S110.

(Step S110)
In step S110, the main CPU 301 performs a symbol code setting process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring a stop control number based on the winning combination determined in the process of step S109 and storing it in a stop control number storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S110 ends, the process proceeds to step S111.

(Step S111)
In step S111, the main CPU 301 performs a reel rotation start preparation process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process for setting a minimum game time. Then, when the process of step S111 ends, the process proceeds to step S112.

(Step S112)
In step S112, the main CPU 301 performs reel stop pre-processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a pull-in prediction process for the rotating left reel 18, middle reel 19, and right reel 20. Then, when the process of step S112 ends, the process proceeds to step S113.

(Step S113)
In step S113, the main CPU 301 performs a reel rotation flag setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for storing information indicating that the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotating in a reel information storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S113 ends, the process proceeds to step S114.

(Step S114)
In step S114, the main CPU 301 performs processing for clearing the operable state flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing to turn off the operable state flag corresponding to the BET button 7 or the MAXBET button 8 in the operable state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S114 ends, the process proceeds to step S115.

(Step S115)
In step S115, the main CPU 301 performs a reel rotation start process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 drives the left stepping motor 151, the middle stepping motor 152, and the right stepping motor 153 via the reel control board 150 to determine the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. Performs processing to rotate at high speed. Then, when the process of step S115 ends, the process proceeds to step S116.

(Step S116)
In step S116, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting an operable state flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the operable state flag corresponding to the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 in the operable state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Do. Then, when the process of step S116 ends, the process proceeds to step S117.

(Step S117)
In step S117, the main CPU 301 performs reel rotation processing which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 detects that the left stop switch 11sw, middle stop switch 12sw, and right stop switch 13sw have detected a stop operation on the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 by the player. Then, processing for stopping the rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is performed. Then, when the process of step S117 ends, the process proceeds to step S118.

(Step S118)
In step S118, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not all reels have stopped. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether all of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 have stopped based on the value of the operable state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. I do. If it is determined that all the reels are stopped (step S118 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119. If it is determined that all the reels are not stopped (step S118 = No), The process proceeds to step S117, and the same process is repeated until all reels stop.

(Step S119)
In step S119, the main CPU 301 performs display determination processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of calculating the number of payouts according to the winning symbol combination. Then, when the process of step S119 ends, the process proceeds to step S120.

(Step S120)
In step S120, the main CPU 301 performs a payout process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of paying out medals by driving the hopper 202 via the power supply board 200 based on the combination of symbols related to “winning” being displayed on the active line. Do. Then, when the process of step S120 ends, the process proceeds to step S121.

(Step S121)
In step S121, the main CPU 301 performs a game state transition process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of shifting the RT gaming state based on the combination of symbols displayed on the active line. Then, when the process of step S121 ends, the process proceeds to step S101, and the main loop process is repeatedly executed.

(Start lever check processing)
Next, the start lever check process performed by the process of step S107 of FIG. 39 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 40 shows a subroutine of the start lever check process.

(Step S107-1)
In step S107-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the start switch is ON. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the start switch 10sw has detected an operation of the start lever 10 by the player. When it is determined that the start switch is ON (step S107-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S107-2, and when it is determined that the start switch is not ON (step S107). −1 = No), the start lever check processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S108 of the main loop processing.

(Step S107-2)
In step S107-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of turning off the re-game operating flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the value of the re-game operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S107-2 ends, the start lever check process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S108 of the main loop process.

(Internal lottery process)
Next, based on FIG. 41, the internal lottery process performed by the process of step S109 of FIG. 39 will be described. FIG. 41 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the internal lottery process.

(Step S109-1)
In step S109-1, the main CPU 301 performs a pre-lottery error check process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of detecting an error before determining the winning combination by the internal lottery process. Then, when the process of step S109-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-2.

  The main CPU 301 performs a non-recoverable error process when an error is detected by the pre-lottery error check process in step S109-1.

(Step S109-2)
In step S109-2, the main CPU 301 performs a hard random number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for extracting the random number value generated by the main random number generator 304 and processing for storing the extracted random number value in a register. Then, when the process of step S109-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-3.

(Step S109-3)
In step S109-3, the main CPU 301 performs a winning number initial value acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for obtaining an initial value of a winning number when determining a winning combination. Here, in this embodiment, the main CPU 301 performs a process of acquiring “39” as the initial value of the winning number and storing it in the register. Then, when the process of step S109-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-4.

(Step S109-4)
In step S109-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the second winning combination determination table. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a second winning combination determination table (see FIG. 20) stored in the main ROM 302. Then, when the process of step S109-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-5.

(Step S109-5)
In step S109-5, the main CPU 301 performs a winning number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a winning number stored in the register. Then, when the process of step S109-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-6.

(Step S109-6)
In step S109-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the winning number is “24” or more. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning number acquired by the winning number acquiring process in step S109-5 is “24” or more. If it is determined that the winning number is “24” or more (step S109-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-11, and it is determined that the winning number is not “24” or more. In this case (step S109-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-7.

(Step S109-7)
In step S109-7, the main CPU 301 performs a gaming state acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a gaming state based on the value of the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S109-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-8.

(Step S109-8)
In step S109-8, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the first winning combination determination table. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting the first winning combination determination table in accordance with the gaming state acquired by the gaming state acquisition processing in step S109-7. For example, when the gaming state acquired by the gaming state acquisition processing in step S109-7 is the first RT gaming state, processing for setting the first winning combination determination table for the first RT gaming state (see FIG. 14) is performed. . Then, when the process of step S109-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-9.

(Step S109-9)
In step S109-9, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery data acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 obtains data related to the winning combination corresponding to the winning number based on the first winning combination determining table set by the process of step S109-8 and the winning number stored in the register. Perform the acquisition process. Then, when the process of step S109-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-10.

(Step S109-10)
In step S109-10, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not there is a lottery. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not to perform the lottery based on the data relating to the winning combination acquired by the lottery data acquisition process of step S109-9. Here, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 determines that the lottery is not performed when the lottery value corresponding to the winning number is “0”. When it is determined that there is no lottery (step S109-10 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-16, and when it is determined that there is no lottery (step S109-10 = No). ), The process proceeds to step S109-11.

(Step S109-11)
In step S <b> 109-11, the main CPU 301 performs a process for determining whether or not the setting is a common value for all settings. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning number acquired by the lottery data acquisition process in step S109-9 is the same lottery value regardless of the set value. If it is determined that the value is a common value for all settings (step S109-11 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S109-13, and if it is determined that the value is not a common value for all settings (step S109). −11 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-12.

(Step S109-12)
In step S109-12, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery value acquisition process by setting value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the first winning combination currently set based on the value stored in the set value storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and the winning number stored in the register. The lottery value of the table or the second winning combination determination table is acquired and stored in the register. Then, when the process of step S109-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-14.

(Step S109-13)
In step S109-13, the main CPU 301 performs all setting common lottery value acquisition processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 acquires a lottery value of the first winning combination determination table or the second winning combination determination table that is currently set based on the winning number stored in the register, and stores it in the register. Perform the process. Then, when the process of step S109-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-14.

(Step S109-14)
In step S109-14, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery confirmation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the lottery value acquired by the lottery value acquisition process by setting value in step S109-12 from the random value stored in the register, or the all setting common lottery value acquisition process in step S109-13. The lottery value acquired by the above is subtracted, and the value of the register in which the random value is stored is updated to the value after the subtraction and stored. Then, when the process of step S109-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-15.

(Step S109-15)
In step S109-15, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the lottery value acquired by the lottery value acquisition process by setting value of step S109-12 from the random number value stored in the register by the lottery confirmation process of step S109-14, or step S109-13. As a result of performing the process of subtracting the lottery value acquired by the all setting common lottery value acquisition process, a process of determining whether or not a negative value has been obtained is performed. If it is determined that the winning is made (step S109-15 = Yes), the subroutine of the internal lottery process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the winning is not made (step S109-15 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-16.

  If it is determined that the winning combination has been won (step S109-15 = Yes), the winning combination corresponding to the winning number stored in the register is determined.

(Step S109-16)
In step S109-16, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the winning number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the winning number stored in the register. Then, when the process of step S109-16 ends, the process proceeds to step S109-17.

(Step S109-17)
In step S109-17, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the winning number is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the value of the winning number is “0” as a result of subtracting “1” from the winning number value stored in the register by the process of step S109-16. Perform the process. If it is determined that the value of the winning number is “0” (step S109-17 = Yes), the internal lottery process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S110 of the main loop process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the winning number is not “0” (step S109-17 = No), the process proceeds to step S109-4.

  In the present embodiment, when the value of the winning number is “0” (step S109-17 = YES), “losing” is determined as the winning combination.

(Design code setting process)
Next, the symbol code setting process performed by the process of step S110 of FIG. 39 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing a subroutine of symbol code setting processing.

(Step S110-1)
In step S110-1, the main CPU 301 performs a stop control number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 stores the winning number of the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process in step S109 as a stop control number in a stop control number storage area provided in the main RAM 303 and sets it in a register. Process. Then, when the process of step S110-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-2.

(Step S110-2)
In step S110-2, the main CPU 301 performs a display permission symbol bit setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is a display permission that is information related to a combination of symbols that is allowed to be displayed on the active line based on the stop control number acquired by the stop control number acquisition process in step S110-1. Performs processing to set symbol bits. Then, when the process of step S110-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-3.

(Step S110-3)
In step S110-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a reel rotation start acceptance command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 sets the reel rotation start acceptance command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the reel rotation start acceptance command to the sub-control board 400. Perform the process. Here, the “reel rotation start acceptance command” is a command having information indicating that the operation of the start lever 10 has been accepted. Then, when the process of step S110-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-4.

(Step S110-4)
In step S110-4, the main CPU 301 performs a spinning effect lottery process. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a lottery process to determine whether or not to perform a spinning effect to rotate the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. If the lottery is won, The process which stores the information which concerns on the winning rotation effect information is performed in the rotation effect information storage area currently set. Then, when the process of step S110-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S110-5.

(Step S110-5)
In step S110-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a conditional device command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the conditional device command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the conditional device command to the sub-control board 400. . Here, the “condition device command” is a command having information related to the winning combination, information related to the spinning effect to be executed, and the like. When the process of step S110-5 ends, the symbol code setting process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S111 of the main loop process.

(Reel rotation start preparation process)
Next, the reel rotation start preparation process performed by the process of step S111 of FIG. 39 will be described based on FIG. FIG. 43 shows a subroutine for reel rotation start preparation processing.

(Step S111-1)
In step S111-1, the main CPU 301 performs a turning effect setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting information for executing the spinning effect based on the information stored in the spinning effect information storage area provided in the main RAM 303, and A process for executing the trunk effect is performed. Then, when the process of step S111-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-2.

(Step S111-2)
In step S111-2, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the minimum game time has elapsed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the timer counter set by the process of step S111-3 described later has become “0” in the previous game. If it is determined that the minimum game time has elapsed (step S111-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S111-3, and if it is determined that the minimum game time has not elapsed ( Step S111-2 = No), the process of step S111-2 is repeatedly executed until the minimum game time has elapsed.

(Step S111-3)
In step S111-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a minimum game time. Specifically, the main CPU 301 is configured so that the time from the process of step S111-3 in the previous game to the process of step S111-2 in the current game is not less than the minimum game time in order to suppress gambling for the game. Then, a process for setting the minimum game time in the timer counter is performed. Here, in the present embodiment, the minimum game time is about “4.1” seconds. Then, when the process of step S111-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S111-4.

(Step S111-4)
In step S111-4, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting a reel rotation start command. Specifically, in order for the main CPU 301 to transmit a reel rotation start command to the sub-control board 400, a process of setting the reel rotation start command in the effect transmission data storage area of the main RAM 303 is performed. Here, the reel rotation start command is a command having information indicating that rotation of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 is started. When the process of step S111-4 is completed, the reel rotation start preparation process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S112 of the main loop process.

(Reel stop pretreatment)
Next, based on FIG. 44, the reel stop pre-process performed by the process of step S112 of FIG. 39 will be described. FIG. 44 is a diagram showing a subroutine for reel stop pre-processing.

(Step S112-1)
In step S112-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting an expected pull-in reel search initial value. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting data “100B” corresponding to the right reel 20 in the register as an expected pull-in reel search initial value. Then, when the process of step S112-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S112-2.

(Step S112-2)
In step S112-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not the reel is rotating. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the left to be searched based on the pull-in expected reel search initial value set in the process of step S112-1 or the value of the search target reel updated in step S112-4 described later. A process of determining whether or not the reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are rotating is performed. If it is determined that the reel is rotating (step S112-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S112-3. If it is determined that the reel is not rotating (step S112- 2 = No), the process proceeds to step S112-4.

(Step S112-3)
In step S112-3, the main CPU 301 performs a pull-in prediction process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 first sets the initial value of the virtual stop position, acquires the pull-in priority according to the virtual stop position, and stores it in the pull-in priority storage area provided in the main RAM 303. I do. Then, when the process of step S112-3 is completed, the process proceeds to step S112-4.

  The main CPU 301 performs a process of clearing data stored in the pull-in priority storage area provided in the main RAM 303 at a predetermined timing by the pull-in prediction process in step S112-3.

(Step S112-4)
In step S112-4, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring the next search target reel. Specifically, when it is determined that the search target reel is stopped (step S112-2 = No), the main CPU 301 performs the search target reel pull-in prediction process in the pull-in prediction process in step S112-3. When the processing is completed, the value set in the register is shifted to the right to obtain the next search target reel. Then, when the process of step S112-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S112-5.

(Step S112-5)
In step S112-5, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the processing of all reels has been completed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the pull-in prediction process for all of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 has been completed. If it is determined that all reels have been processed (step S112-5 = Yes), the reel stop pre-processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S113 of the main loop process. On the other hand, if it is determined that all reels have not been processed (step S112-5 = No), the process proceeds to step S112-2, and all of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are processed. The same process is repeatedly executed until the pull-in prediction process for the reel is completed.

(Processing during reel rotation)
Next, based on FIG. 45, the reel rotation process performed by the process of step S117 of FIG. 39 will be described. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing during reel rotation.

(Step S117-1)
In step S117-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the stop button is being pressed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines whether or not the left stop switch 11sw, middle stop switch 12sw, and right stop switch 13sw have detected an operation of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 by the player. Processing to determine is performed. If it is determined that the stop button has been pressed (step S117-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S117-2, and if it is determined that the stop button has not been pressed (step S117). -1 = No), the reel rotation process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S118 of the main loop process.

(Step S117-2)
In step S117-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning off the operable state flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the left stop button 11 in the operable state flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303 based on the operated left stop button 11, middle stop button 12, and right stop button 13. Processing to turn off the operable flag corresponding to the stop button 12 and the right stop button 13 is performed. Then, when the process of step S117-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-3.

(Step S117-3)
In step S117-3, the main CPU 301 performs a pressing information storing process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 includes the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, the right reel 20 and the left stepping motor corresponding to the operated stop button among the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13. 151, based on the values of the pulse counters supplied to the middle stepping motor 152 and the right stepping motor 153, a process of acquiring the pressing reference position and storing it in the pressing reference position storage area provided in the main RAM 303 is performed. Then, when the process of step S117-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-4.

(Step S117-4)
In step S117-4, the main CPU 301 performs a sliding frame number acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 includes a sliding frame number determination table (not shown) provided in the main ROM 302, the winning combination determined by the internal lottery process, the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right Based on the operation order of the stop button 13 and the like, a process of acquiring the number of sliding frames is performed. Here, in the present embodiment, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining the number of sliding frames within the range of “0” frames to “4” frames as the number of sliding frames. Then, when the process of step S117-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-5.

(Step S117-5)
In step S117-5, the main CPU 301 performs a reel stop process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 removes the reel based on the pressing reference position stored by the pressing information storing process in step S117-3 and the sliding frame number acquired by the sliding frame number acquisition process in step S117-4. Process to stop. Then, when the process of step S117-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S117-6.

(Step S117-6)
In step S117-6, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a reel stop command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the reel stop command in an effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the reel stop command to the sub-control board 400. . Here, the “reel stop command” is a command having information such as a pressing reference position and the number of sliding frames. When the process of step S117-6 is completed, the subroutine for the reel rotation process is ended, and the process proceeds to step S118 of the main loop process.

(Display judgment processing)
Next, based on FIG. 46, the display determination process performed by the process of step S119 of FIG. 39 is demonstrated. FIG. 46 is a diagram showing a subroutine of display determination processing.

(Step S119-1)
In step S119-1, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a display determination command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the display determination command in an effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the display determination command to the sub-control board 400. . Here, the “display determination command” is a command having information on a combination of symbols displayed on the active line. Then, when the process of step S119-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S119-2.

(Step S119-2)
In step S119-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a blank is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the symbol combination related to “blank” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that a blank is displayed (step S119-2 = Yes), the display determination process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S120 of the main loop process. On the other hand, if it is determined that no blank is displayed (step S119-2 = No), the process proceeds to step S119-3.

(Step S119-3)
In step S119-3, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not a winning is achieved. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the symbol combination related to “winning” is displayed on the active line. When it is determined that a winning is achieved (step S119-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-4, and when it is determined that a winning is not achieved (step S119-3). = No), the process proceeds to step S119-5.

(Step S119-4)
In step S119-4, the main CPU 301 performs a payout number calculation process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of calculating the number of payouts based on the combination of symbols related to “winning” displayed on the active line. When the process of step S119-4 ends, the display determination process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S120 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-5)
In step S119-5, the main CPU 301 performs processing for determining whether or not replay is established. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a symbol combination related to “replay” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that replay has been established (step S119-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S119-6, and if it is determined that replay has not been established (step S119-5). = No), the display determination process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S120 of the main loop process.

(Step S119-6)
In step S119-6, the main CPU 301 performs a process of turning on the re-game operating flag. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for turning on the value of the re-game operating flag storage area provided in the main RAM 303. When the process of step S119-6 ends, the display determination process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S120 of the main loop process.

(Game state transition process)
Next, based on FIG. 47, the game state transition process performed by the process of step S121 of FIG. 39 will be described. FIG. 47 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the game state transition process.

(Step S121-1)
In step S121-1, the main CPU 301 performs RT gaming state transition processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the main CPU 301 performs a process of shifting the RT game state based on the current game state and the combination of symbols displayed on the active line. Then, when the process of step S121-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S121-2.

(Step S121-2)
In step S121-2, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting a game end command. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting the game end command in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 in order to transmit the game end command to the sub-control board 400. . Here, the “game end command” is a command having information that the game has ended, information related to the game state, and the like. When the process of step S121-2 ends, the game state transition process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S101 of the main loop process.

(RT gaming state transition processing)
Next, based on FIG. 48, the RT game state transition process performed by the process of step S121-1 of FIG. 47 will be described. FIG. 48 is a diagram showing a subroutine of RT gaming state transition processing.

(Step S121-1-1)
In step S121-1-1, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not a game state transition symbol is displayed. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines a combination of symbols related to “blank”, a combination of symbols related to “preparation replay”, a combination of symbols related to “Bonus replay”, a combination of symbols related to “ART replay”, Among the symbol combinations related to “Replay” or the symbol combinations related to “RUSH Replay”, processing is performed to determine whether any symbol combination is displayed on the active line. When the game state transition symbol is displayed (step S121-1-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S121-1-2, and it is determined that the game state transition symbol is not displayed. (Step S121-1-1 = No), the RT game state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to Step S121-2 of the game state transition process.

(Step S121-1-2)
In step S121-1-2, the main CPU 301 performs a gaming state acquisition process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for acquiring a gaming state based on the value of the gaming state storage area provided in the main RAM 303. Then, when the process of step S121-1-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S121-1-3.

(Step S121-1-3)
In step S121-1-3, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not it is a game state transition time. Specifically, as shown in the game state transition diagram (see FIG. 21), the main CPU 301 performs step S121-1- when, for example, a combination of symbols related to “blank” is displayed in the non-RT game state. Based on the combination of the gaming state acquired by the gaming state acquisition processing of No. 2 and the symbols displayed on the active line, processing for determining whether or not the gaming state is being shifted is performed. If it is determined that the game state is being changed (step S121-1-3 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S121-1-4, and if it is determined that the game state is not being changed. (Step S121-1-3 = No), the RT game state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to Step S121-2 of the game state transition process.

(Step S121-1-4)
In step S121-1-4, the main CPU 301 performs a gaming state setting process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 determines the gaming state provided in the main RAM 303 based on the combination of the gaming state acquired by the gaming state acquisition process in step S121-1-2 and the symbols displayed on the active line. Processing to update the value of the storage area is performed. When the process of step S121-1-4 is completed, the RT gaming state transition process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S121-2 of the gaming state transition process.

(Interrupt processing)
Next, the interrupt process will be described with reference to FIG. Here, the interrupt process is a process performed by interrupting the main loop process every “1.49 ms”.

(Step S201)
In step S <b> 201, the main CPU 301 performs processing for saving a register. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for saving the value of the register used at the time of step S201. Then, when the process of step S201 ends, the process proceeds to step S202.

(Step S202)
In step S202, the main CPU 301 performs input port read processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for receiving predetermined signals from the status board 100, the reel control board 150, the power supply board 200, and the setting switch board 250. Then, when the process of step S202 ends, the process proceeds to step S203.

(Step S203)
In step S203, the main CPU 301 performs an external signal output data set process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting output port data of the external concentrated terminal board 47 when there is an output request for an external signal related to an error. Then, when the process of step S203 ends, the process proceeds to step S204.

(Step S204)
In step S204, the main CPU 301 performs a timer measurement process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the timer for effect at the time of the spinning effect and the value of the timer counter for measuring the minimum game time and the like. Then, when the process of step S204 ends, the process proceeds to step S205.

(Step S205)
In step S205, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “3” as the reel number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of setting “3” as the reel number in order to set the target of the reel to be driven and controlled in the reel drive control process of step S206 described later. Then, when the process of step S205 ends, the process proceeds to step S206.

(Step S206)
In step S206, the main CPU 301 performs a reel drive control process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 via the reel control board 150, the reel number set by the process of step S205 or the left reel 18 corresponding to the reel number set by the process of step S207 described later, By driving the left stepping motor 151, the middle stepping motor 152, and the right stepping motor 153 of the reel 19, the right reel 20, rotation acceleration, constant speed, deceleration control, etc. of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20 are controlled. Do. Then, when the process of step S206 ends, the process proceeds to step S207.

  In this embodiment, the main CPU 301 performs drive control of the right reel 20 when the reel number is “3”, and performs drive control of the middle reel 19 when the reel number is “2”. When the reel number is “1”, drive control of the left reel 18 is performed.

(Step S207)
In step S207, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the reel number. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the reel number currently set in the register. Then, when the process of step S207 ends, the process proceeds to step S208.

(Step S208)
In step S208, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the reel number is “0”. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of determining whether or not the reel drive control process of step S206 has been performed for all the reels of the left reel 18, the middle reel 19, and the right reel 20. When it is determined that the reel number is “0” (step S208 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S209, and when it is determined that the reel number is not “0” (step S208). = No), the process proceeds to step S206.

(Step S209)
In step S209, the main CPU 301 performs an external signal output process. In this processing, the main CPU 301 performs processing for setting output port data of the external concentration terminal board 47 and the like. Then, when the process of step S209 ends, the process proceeds to step S210.

(Step S210)
In step S210, the main CPU 301 performs LED output data creation processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 includes a start lamp 24, a first BET lamp 25, a second BET lamp 26, a third BET lamp 27, a stored number display 28, a payout number display 29, a throwable display lamp 30, and a replay display. Processing for creating display data of the lamp 31 is performed. Then, when the process of step S210 ends, the process proceeds to step S211.

  The main CPU 301 controls to turn on a re-game display lamp lighting flag provided in the main RAM 303 when creating display data for lighting the re-game display lamp 31 in the LED output data creation processing in step S210. When the display data for turning off the re-game display lamp 31 is created, the re-game display lamp lighting flag provided in the main RAM 303 is turned off.

(Step S211)
In step S211, the main CPU 301 performs an LED display process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 includes a start lamp 24, a first BET lamp 25, a second BET lamp 26, a third BET lamp 27, a stored number display 28, a payout number display 29, a throwable display lamp 30, and a replay display. The lamp 31 is controlled. Then, when the process of step S211 is completed, the process proceeds to step S212.

(Step S212)
In step S212, the main CPU 301 performs control command transmission processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs processing for transmitting various commands set in the effect transmission data storage area provided in the main RAM 303 to the sub-control board 400. Then, when the process of step S212 ends, the process proceeds to step S213.

(Step S213)
In step S213, the main CPU 301 performs port output processing. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of transmitting a predetermined signal to the status board 100, the reel control board 150, the power supply board 200, and the sub control board 400. Then, when the process of step S213 ends, the process proceeds to step S214.

(Step S214)
In step S214, the main CPU 301 performs a register restoration process. Specifically, the main CPU 301 performs a process of restoring the saved register value in the process of step S201. Then, when the process of step S214 ends, the interrupt process ends, and the process returns to the main loop process.

(Main processing on sub-control board)
Next, the main process in the sub control board will be described with reference to FIG.

(Step S301)
In step S301, the sub CPU 401 performs an initialization process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing such as error checking of the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S301 ends, the process proceeds to step S302.

(Step S302)
In step S302, the sub CPU 401 performs main board communication processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for analyzing a command transmitted from the main control board 300 and the like. Then, when the process of step S302 ends, the process proceeds to step S303.

(Step S303)
In step S303, the sub CPU 401 performs sound control processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs the upper left speaker 40, the lower left speaker 41, the upper right speaker 42, and the lower right speaker via the amplifier board 500 based on the content of the effect determined by the sub effect determination process described later. The process of outputting audio from 43 is performed. Then, when the process of step S303 ends, the process proceeds to step S304.

(Step S304)
In step S304, the sub CPU 401 performs lamp control processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs the Bonus display unit 32, the ART display unit 33, the RUSH display unit 34, and the stop via the panel LED relay board 700 based on the content of the effect determined by the sub effect determination process described later. The button operation display unit 35, start lever LED 36, MAXBET button LED 721, stop button LED 722, effect button LED 723, and waist panel LED 724 are controlled. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs the effect device 50, the left effect device motor 651, and the right effect device via the effect control board 600 and the effect device drive board 650, based on the effect contents determined by the sub effect determination process described later. The motor 654, the left liquid crystal lift motor 657, and the right liquid crystal lift motor 660 are controlled. Then, when the process of step S304 ends, the process proceeds to step S305.

(Step S305)
In step S305, the sub CPU 401 performs image control processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 controls the liquid crystal display device 46 via the effect control board 600 based on the effect contents determined by the sub effect determining process described later. Then, when the process of step S305 ends, the process proceeds to step S306.

(Step S306)
In step S306, the sub CPU 401 performs various switch detection processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of executing a predetermined process when the effect button detection sensor 710sw detects an operation of the effect button 21 or when the cross key board 711 detects an operation of the cross key 22. . Then, when the process of step S306 ends, the process proceeds to step S302.

(Main board communication processing)
Next, based on FIG. 51, the main board | substrate communication process performed by the process of step S302 of FIG. 50 is demonstrated. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a subroutine of main board communication processing.

(Step S302-1)
In step S302-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a different command is received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the command transmitted from the main control board 300 is a command different from the command transmitted last time. If it is determined that a different command has been received (step S302-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-2. If it is determined that a different command has not been received (step S302). −1 = No), the main board communication process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Step S302-2)
In step S302-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a game information storage process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for creating game information based on a command different from the previously transmitted command and storing it in a predetermined storage area of the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3.

(Step S302-3)
In step S302-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a command analysis process that will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In this process, the sub CPU 401 executes a process based on the game information stored by the process of step S302-2. When the process of step S302-3 ends, the main board communication process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Command analysis processing)
Next, based on FIG. 52, the command analysis process performed by the process of step S302-3 of FIG. 51 is demonstrated. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing a subroutine of command analysis processing.

(Step S302-3-1)
In step S302-3-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a command-by-command process, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the sub CPU 401 performs processing according to the command received from the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2.

(Step S302-3-2)
In step S302-3-2, the sub CPU 401 performs lamp data determination processing. Specifically, sub CPU401 performs the process which determines the lamp data corresponding to the production content determined by the process according to command of step S302-3-1. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-3.

(Step S302-3-3)
In step S302-3-3, the sub CPU 401 performs sound data determination processing. Specifically, sub CPU401 performs the process which determines the sound data corresponding to the production content determined by the process according to command of step S302-3-1. Then, when the process of step S302-3-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4.

(Step S302-3-4)
In step S302-3-4, the sub CPU 401 performs image data determination processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining image data corresponding to the effect content determined by the command-specific processing in step S302-3-1. When the process of step S302-3-4 ends, the command analysis process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S303 of the main process in the sub control board.

(Processing by command)
Next, based on FIG. 53, the command-by-command processing performed by the processing in step S302-3-1 in FIG. 52 will be described. FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a subroutine for processing by command.

(Step S302-3-1-1)
In step S302-3-1-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a conditional device command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the command received from the main control board 300 is a conditional device command. If it is determined that the received command is a conditional device command (step S302-3-1-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2, and the received command is a condition command. If it is determined that the command is not an apparatus command (step S302-3-1-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-3-1-3.

(Step S302-3-1-2)
In step S302-3-1-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a conditional device command reception process which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the sub CPU 401 performs processing according to the condition device command received from the main control board 300 and the state managed by the sub control board 400. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6.

(Step S302-3-3-1)
In step S302-3-3-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a display determination command has been received. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the command received from the main control board 300 is a display determination command. If it is determined that the received command is a display determination command (step S302-3-3-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-1-4, and the received command is displayed. If it is determined that the command is not a determination command (step S302-3-3-1 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-5-1-5.

(Step S302-3-1-4)
In step S302-3-1-1-4, the sub CPU 401 performs display determination command reception processing, which will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the sub CPU 401 performs processing according to the display determination command received from the main control board 300 and the state managed by the sub control board 400. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-1-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6.

(Step S302-3-5-1-5)
In step S302-3-1-1-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing according to the received command. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing according to the command received from the main control board 300. Then, when the process of step S302-3-5-1-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1-6.

(Step S302-3-1-6)
In step S302-3-1-6, the sub CPU 401 performs a sub effect determination process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a condition device command reception process in step S302-3-1-2, a display determination command reception process in step S302-3-1-1, and a process according to the received command. Based on the execution result and the effect determination table (see FIG. 24), processing for determining the effect executed by the liquid crystal display device 46 or the like is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-6 ends, the command-specific process subroutine ends, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-2 of the command analysis process.

(Processing when receiving conditional device command)
Next, based on FIG. 54, the conditional device command reception process performed by the process of step S302-3-1-2 of FIG. 53 will be described. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing when a conditional device command is received.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1)
In step S302-3-2-1-1, the sub CPU 401 performs state transition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing according to the state managed by the sub control board 400 based on the value of the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Here, in the state-by-state transition process in step S302-3-2-1-1, a subroutine corresponding to the value of the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is provided (see FIGS. 55 to 75). Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-2)
In step S302-3-1-2-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the chance state winning flag is ON. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the chance state winning flag is ON based on the value of the chance state winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the chance state winning flag is ON (step S302-3-1-2-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-3, and the chance state If it is determined that the winning flag is not ON (step S302-3-1-2-2 = No), the subroutine for the conditional device command reception process is terminated, and step S302-3-1 for the command-specific process. The process is shifted to -6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-3)
In step S302-3-1-2-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” in the fake game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-2-3 is completed, the subroutine of the conditional device command reception process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1 of the command-specific process.

(Normal processing)
Next, based on FIG. 55, normal state processing performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is in the normal state in the state-by-state transition processing in step S <b> 302-3-2-1 in FIG. 54. Will be described. FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a subroutine for normal state processing.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-1)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-1-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-1-2.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-1-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the fake game number counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more. If it is determined that the value of the fake game number counter is “1” or more (step S302-3-1-2-1-1-2 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-2 is performed. When the process proceeds to 1-1-3 and it is determined that the value of the fake game number counter is not equal to or greater than “1” (step S302-3-1-2-1-1-2 = No), The process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-1-4.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-1-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-1-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the fake game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-4.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-1-4)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-4, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning number is “05”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is the winning number “05”. And when it determines with a winning number being "05" (step S302-3-2-1-1-4 = Yes), step S302-3-2-1-1-1-5. When it is determined that the winning number is not “05” (step S302-3-1-2-1-4 = No), step S302-3-1-2-1 is performed. The process is shifted to -1-7.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-1-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “50” to the value of the third Bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the third bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-1-5 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-1-6.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-1-6)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the third Bonus state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the third Bonus state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the third Bonus state. When the processing of step S302-3-2-1-1-1-6 is completed, the normal state processing subroutine is terminated, and the conditional device command reception processing is advanced to step S302-3-1-2-2. Migrate processing.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-1-7)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-7, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ceiling game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-1-1. To determine whether or not the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the ceiling game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-2-12-1-7 = Yes), step S302-3-2-12-1 is performed. When the process is shifted to -1-8 and it is determined that the value of the ceiling game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-1-7 = No), step S302 is performed. The process proceeds to 3-1-2-1-1-10.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-1-8)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-1-8, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus standby distribution process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 waits for the first Bonus, the second Bonus, and the third Bonus based on the Bonus state distribution lottery table (normal state) (see FIG. 26A) provided in the sub ROM 402. Processing for determining one of the waiting is performed. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of storing in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 when it is determined that the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, or the third Bonus standby is determined. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-1-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-1-9.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-1-9)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-9, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the Bonus preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the Bonus preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the Bonus preparation state. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-1-9 ends, the normal state process subroutine ends, and the conditional device command reception process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2. Migrate processing.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-1-10)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-1-10, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus preparation state transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 stores information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (normal state) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 25A). Based on this, the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-1-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-12-1-11.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-11)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-11, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state as a result of the lottery process by the Bonus preparation state shift lottery process in Step S302-3-2-1-1-1-10. Perform the process. And when it determines with having been elected (step S302-3-2-1-1-1-11 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-2-1-1-1-12, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-2-1-1-1-11 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-1-15.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-1-12)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-1-12, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus standby distribution process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 waits for the first Bonus, the second Bonus, and the third Bonus based on the Bonus state distribution lottery table (normal state) (see FIG. 26A) provided in the sub ROM 402. Processing for determining one of the waiting is performed. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of storing in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 when it is determined that the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, or the third Bonus standby is determined. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-1-1-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-1-1-13.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-1-1-13)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-1-13, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus precursor game number lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the bonus based on the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the Bonus precursor game number determination table (see FIG. 27A) provided in the sub ROM 402. The number of precursor games until the transition to the ready state is determined, and processing for setting the value of the Bonus precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-1-13 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-1-1-14.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-1-14)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-14, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the Bonus precursor state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the Bonus precursor state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the Bonus precursor state. Then, when the processing of step S302-3-2-1-1-1-14 is completed, the normal state processing subroutine is terminated, and the conditional device command reception processing is advanced to step S302-3-1-2-2. Migrate processing.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-1-15)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-1-15, the sub CPU 401 performs a chance state lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 shifts to the chance state based on the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the chance state shift lottery table (see FIG. 28) provided in the sub ROM 402. A process of lottery is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-1-1-15 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-1-16.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-1-16)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-16, the sub CPU 401 performs a process for determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not it is determined to shift to the chance state as a result of the lottery process by the chance state transition lottery process in step S302-3-2-1-1-1-15. I do. And when it determines with having been elected (step S302-3-2-1-1-1-16 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-2-1-1-1-17, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-2-1-2-1-16 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-1-20.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-1-17)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-17, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the chance precursor state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the chance precursor state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the chance precursor state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-1-17 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-1-18.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-1-18)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-1-18, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning on the chance state winning flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning on the chance state winning flag in the chance state winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-1-18 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-1-19.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-1-19)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-19, the sub CPU 401 performs a chance precursor game number lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the chance based on the information relating to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the chance predictor game number determination table (see FIG. 27B) provided in the sub ROM 402. The number of precursor games until the transition to the state is determined, and the value of the chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is set. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-1-19 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-12-1-20.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-20)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-20, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the chance state winning flag is OFF. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the chance state winning flag is OFF based on the value of the chance state winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the chance state winning flag is OFF (step S302-3-2-1-1-1-20 = Yes), step S302-3-2-1-2-1-21. When it is determined that the chance state winning flag is not OFF (step S302-3-2-1-2-1-20 = No), the normal state processing subroutine is terminated, The processing shifts to step S302-3-1-2-2 of the processing at the time of receiving the conditional device command.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-1-21)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-1-21, the sub CPU 401 performs a fake game number lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 is based on the information relating to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the normal state fake game number determination table provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 29A). Then, processing for determining the number of fake games and setting the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-1-21 is completed, the subroutine for the normal state process is terminated, and the condition device command reception process is advanced to step S302-3-1-2-2. Migrate processing.

(Treatment for chance precursor state)
Next, based on FIG. 56, in the state transition processing in step S302-3-2-1-1 of FIG. 54, the chance precursor state performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the chance precursor state. The processing will be described. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a subroutine of chance sign state processing.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-1)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-2-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-2-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-1-2.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-1-1-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning number is “05”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is the winning number “05”. If it is determined that the winning number is “05” (step S302-3-2-1-2-2 = Yes), step S302-3-2-1-2-1-2 If it is determined that the winning number is not “05” (step S302-3-2-1-2-2 = No), step S302-3-1-2-1 is performed. The process is shifted to -2-5.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-2-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-1-1-1-2-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the third Bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the third bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-4.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-4)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-4, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the third Bonus state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the third Bonus state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the third Bonus state. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-4 ends, the chance sign state processing subroutine ends, and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-5)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-2-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the chance sign state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the chance sign state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-6.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-6)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-6, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ceiling game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-2-1. To determine whether or not the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the ceiling game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-6 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-1 is performed. When the processing is shifted to -2-7 and it is determined that the value of the ceiling game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-6 = No), step S302 is performed. The process is transferred to 3-1-2-1-2-9.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-7)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-7-7, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus standby distribution process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 waits for the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, based on the Bonus state distribution lottery table (chance precursor state) (see FIG. 26B) provided in the sub ROM 402. A process for determining any of the three Bonus standbys is performed. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of storing in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 when it is determined that the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, or the third Bonus standby is determined. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-8.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-8-8)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-8, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the Bonus preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the Bonus preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the Bonus preparation state. When the processing of step S302-3-2-1-2-8 ends, the chance sign state processing subroutine ends and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the conditional device command reception processing ends. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-9)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-9, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus preparation state transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 includes information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and a Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (chance precursor state) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 25B). Based on the above, the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-10.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-10)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-10, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not it is determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state as a result of the lottery process by the Bonus preparation state transition lottery process in Step S302-3-2-1-2-9. Perform the process. And when it determines with having been elected (step S302-3-2-1-2-10 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-2-1-2-11, When it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-2-1-2-10 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-14.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-11)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-11, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus standby distribution process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 waits for the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, based on the Bonus state distribution lottery table (chance precursor state) (see FIG. 26B) provided in the sub ROM 402. A process for determining any of the three Bonus standbys is performed. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of storing in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 when it is determined that the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, or the third Bonus standby is determined. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-12.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-12)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-12, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus precursor game number lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the bonus based on the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the Bonus precursor game number determination table (see FIG. 27A) provided in the sub ROM 402. The number of precursor games until the transition to the ready state is determined, and processing for setting the value of the Bonus precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-13.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-13)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-13, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the Bonus precursor state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the Bonus precursor state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the Bonus precursor state. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-13 ends, the chance sign state processing subroutine ends, and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-14)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-14, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the chance sign state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 obtains a result of subtracting “1” from the value of the chance precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-5. Then, a process is performed to determine whether or not the value of the chance sign state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 has become “0”. If it is determined that the value of the chance sign state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-14 = Yes), step S302-3-1-1 When the process proceeds to 2-1-2-15 and it is determined that the value of the chance sign state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-14) = No), the subroutine for the chance precursor state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 in the process at the time of receiving the conditional device command.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-15)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-15, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the chance state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the chance state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the chance state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-16.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-16)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-16, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the chance state winning flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the chance state winning flag in the chance state winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-16 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-17.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-17)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-17, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “10” to the value of the chance state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “10” to the value of the chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. When the processing of step S302-3-2-1-2-17 ends, the chance sign state processing subroutine ends, and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the conditional device command reception processing ends. The process is transferred to.

(Process for Bonus precursor state)
Next, based on FIG. 57, in the state-specific migration processing in step S302-3-2-1-1 of FIG. The processing will be described. FIG. 57 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the Bonus precursor state process.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-3-1)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-3-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-3-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-3-2.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-3-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-3-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the value of the fake game number counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more. When it is determined that the value of the fake game number counter is “1” or more (step S302-3-1-2-1-3-2 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-2 is performed. When the processing is shifted to 1-3-3 and it is determined that the value of the fake game number counter is not “1” or more (step S302-3-2-1-1-2-2 = No), The process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-3-4.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-3-3)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-3-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” in the fake game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-3-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-3-4.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-3-4)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-3-4, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning number is “05”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is the winning number “05”. If it is determined that the winning number is “05” (step S302-3-2-1-2-3 = Yes), step S302-3-2-1-2-3-5 is performed. If it is determined that the winning number is not “05” (step S302-3-1-2-1-3-4 = No), step S302-3-2-1-1 is performed. Shifts the process to -3--7.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-3-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-3-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “50” to the value of the third Bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the third bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-3-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-3-6.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-3-6)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-3-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the third Bonus state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the third Bonus state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the third Bonus state. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-3-6 ends, the Bonus precursor state process subroutine ends, and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-3-7)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-3-7, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ceiling game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-3-1. To determine whether or not the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in is “0”. When it is determined that the value of the ceiling game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-3-7 = Yes), step S302-3-2-12-1 is performed. When the process proceeds to -3-8 and it is determined that the value of the ceiling game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-3-7 = No), step S302 is performed. The process moves to 3-1-2-1-3-9.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-3-8)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-3-8, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the Bonus preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the Bonus preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the Bonus preparation state. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-3-8 ends, the Bonus precursor state process subroutine ends, and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-3-9)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-3-9, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the first Bonus standby or the second Bonus standby is performed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the first Bonus standby or the second Bonus standby is performed based on the value of the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. When it is determined that the first Bonus is waiting or the second Bonus is waiting (Step S302-3-2-1-2-9-9 = Yes), Step S302-3-2-1-1 is performed. When the process proceeds to -3-10 and it is determined that the first Bonus is not waiting or the second Bonus is not waiting (Step S302-3-2-1-2-3-9 = No), Step S302 is performed. The process shifts to 3-1-2-1-3-11.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-3-10)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-3-10, the sub CPU 401 performs a promotion lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the promotion lottery table (waiting for the first Bonus) provided in the sub ROM 402 based on the value of the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 (see FIG. 30A). ) Or the promotion lottery table (waiting for the second Bonus) (see FIG. 30B), the selected promotion lottery table and the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command On the basis of the first Bonus standby, the lottery for determining whether the second Bonus standby or the third Bonus standby is performed, and in the second Bonus standby, the lottery for determining whether the third Bonus is standby is performed. The lottery result is stored in a Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-3-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-3-11.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-3-11)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-3-11, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the Bonus precursor state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the Bonus precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-3-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-3-12.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-3-12)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-3-12, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the value of the Bonus precursor state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the Bonus precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the Bonus precursor state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-3-12 = Yes), step S302-3-1-1 When the process proceeds to 2-1-3-13 and it is determined that the value of the Bonus precursor state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-1-3-12). = No), the Bonus precursor state process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 of the conditional device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-3-13)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-3-13, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the Bonus preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the Bonus preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the Bonus preparation state. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-13-13 is completed, the Bonus precursor state process subroutine is terminated, and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the conditional device command reception process is terminated. The process is transferred to.

(Chance state processing)
Next, based on FIG. 58, the chance state process performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the chance state in the state-by-state transition process in step S302-3-2-1 in FIG. Will be described. FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a subroutine of chance state processing.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-4-1)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-4-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-4-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-4-2.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-4-2)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-4-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the winning number is “05”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is the winning number “05”. And when it determines with a winning number being "05" (step S302-3-2-1-1-4-2 = Yes), step S302-3-2-1-1-4-3. If it is determined that the winning number is not “05” (step S302-3-1-2-1-4-2 = No), step S302-3-1-2-1 is performed. The process is shifted to -4-6.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-4)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-4-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “50” to the value of the third Bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the third bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-4-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-4-4.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-4-4)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-4-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the third Bonus state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the third Bonus state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the third Bonus state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-4-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-4-5.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-4-5)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-4-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the chance state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the processing of step S302-3-2-1-2-4-5 is completed, the chance state processing subroutine is terminated, and the conditional device command reception processing is advanced to step S302-3-1-2-2. Migrate processing.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-4-6)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-4-6, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ceiling game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S302-3-2-1-4-1. To determine whether or not the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in is “0”. When it is determined that the value of the ceiling game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-4-6 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2-1. When the process proceeds to -4--7 and it is determined that the value of the ceiling game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-4-6 = No), step S302 is performed. The process shifts to 3-1-2-1-4-9.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-4-7)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-4-7, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus standby distribution process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 waits for the first Bonus, the second Bonus, and the third Bonus based on the Bonus state distribution lottery table (chance state) (see FIG. 26C) provided in the sub ROM 402. Processing for determining one of the waiting is performed. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of storing in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 when it is determined that the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, or the third Bonus standby is determined. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-4-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-4-8.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-4-8)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-4-8, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the Bonus preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the Bonus preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the Bonus preparation state. When the processing of step S302-3-2-1-2-4-8 is completed, the chance state processing subroutine is terminated, and the conditional device command reception processing is advanced to step S302-3-1-2-2. Migrate processing.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-4-9)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-4-9, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the chance state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-4-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-4-10.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-4-10)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-4-10, the sub CPU 401 performs a chance state bonus preparation state transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 stores information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and a Bonus preparation state transition lottery table (chance state) provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 25C). Based on this, the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the Bonus preparation state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-4-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-4-11.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-4-11)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-4-11, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, whether or not the sub CPU 401 has determined to shift to the Bonus preparation state as a result of the lottery by the chance state Bonus preparation state transition lottery process in Step S302-3-2-1-2-4-10. The process which determines is performed. And when it determines with having been elected (step S302-3-2-1-2-4-11 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-2-1-2-4-12, When it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-2-1-2-4-11 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-4-14.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-4-12)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-4-12, the sub CPU 401 performs a Bonus standby distribution process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 waits for the first Bonus, the second Bonus, and the third Bonus based on the Bonus state distribution lottery table (chance state) (see FIG. 26C) provided in the sub ROM 402. Processing for determining one of the waiting is performed. Further, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of storing in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 when it is determined that the first Bonus standby, the second Bonus standby, or the third Bonus standby is determined. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-4-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-4-13.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-4-13)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-4-13, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the Bonus preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the Bonus preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the Bonus preparation state. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-4-13 ends, the chance state processing subroutine ends, and the conditional device command reception process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2. Migrate processing.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-4-14)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-4-14, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the chance state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the chance state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-4-9. Processing for determining whether or not the value of the chance state game number counter provided in the sub-RAM 403 has become “0” is performed. When it is determined that the value of the chance state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-4-14 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2 is performed. When the process is shifted to -1-4-15 and it is determined that the value of the chance state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-4-14 = No) ), The chance state process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 of the conditional device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-4-15)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-4-15, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the normal state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the normal state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the normal state. When the processing of step S302-3-2-1-2-4-15 ends, the chance status processing subroutine ends, and the conditional device command reception processing proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2. Migrate processing.

(Bonus ready state processing)
Next, based on FIG. 59, the Bonus preparation state performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the Bonus preparation state in the state-specific migration processing of Step S302-3-2-1 in FIG. The processing will be described. FIG. 59 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the Bonus preparation state process.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-5-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing to determine whether or not the winning number is “05”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command received from the main control board 300 is the winning number “05”. If it is determined that the winning number is “05” (step S302-3-2-1-5-1 = Yes), step S302-3-2-1-2-5-1 is performed. When it is determined that the winning number is not “05” (step S302-3-2-1-1-5-1 = No), step S302-3-2-12-1 is performed. The process is shifted to -5-4.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-5-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “50” to the value of the third Bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the third bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-5-2 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-5-3.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-5-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-5-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the third Bonus state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the third Bonus state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the third Bonus state. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-5-3 ends, the subroutine for the Bonus preparation state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the condition device command reception process ends. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-5-4)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-5-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the first Bonus standby or the second Bonus standby is performed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the first Bonus standby or the second Bonus standby is performed based on the value of the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the first Bonus is waiting or the second Bonus is waiting (step S302-3-2-1-2-5-4 = Yes), step S302-3-2-1-1 is performed. When the process proceeds to -5-5 and it is determined that the first Bonus is not waiting or the second Bonus is not waiting (step S302-3-2-1-2-5-4 = No), the Bonus preparation is performed. The state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 in the conditional device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-5-5)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-5-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a promotion lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the promotion lottery table (waiting for the first Bonus) provided in the sub ROM 402 based on the value of the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 (see FIG. 30A). ) Or the promotion lottery table (waiting for the second Bonus) (see FIG. 30B), the selected promotion lottery table and the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command On the basis of the first Bonus standby, the lottery for determining whether the second Bonus standby or the third Bonus standby is performed, and in the second Bonus standby, the lottery for determining whether the third Bonus is standby is performed. The lottery result is stored in a Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-5-5 ends, the subroutine for the Bonus preparation state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is transferred to.

(Process for the first Bonus state)
Next, based on FIG. 60, the first Bonus state performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the first Bonus state in the state-by-state transition process in Step S <b> 302-3-2-1 in FIG. 54. The processing will be described. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the first Bonus state process.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-6-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the first bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the first bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-6-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-6-2.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-6-2)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-6-2, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART preparation state transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines that the winning combination included in the conditional device command is on condition that the value of the ART winning flag stored in the ART winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is OFF. Based on this information and the first Bonus state ART ready state transition lottery table (see FIG. 31A) provided in the sub-ROM 402, a process of lottering whether to shift to the ART ready state is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-6-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-6-3.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-6-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-6-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not it is determined to shift to the ART preparation state as a result of the lottery processing by the ART preparation state transition lottery process in step S302-3-2-1-2-6-2. Perform the process. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-2-1-2-6-3 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-2-1-2-6-4, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-2-1-2-6-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-6-5.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-6-4)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-6-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning on the ART winning flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning on the ART winning flag in the ART winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-6-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-6-5.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-6-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-6-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the first bonus state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the first Bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S302-3-2-1-6-1. Then, a process of determining whether or not the value of the first bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0” is performed. If it is determined that the value of the first Bonus state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-6-5 = Yes), step S302-3-1-1— When the process proceeds to 2-1-6-6 and it is determined that the value of the first Bonus state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-1-6-5). = No), the first bonus state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 of the conditional device command reception processing.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-6-6)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-6-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the ART winning flag is ON. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the ART winning flag is ON based on a value stored in an ART winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the ART winning flag is ON (step S302-3-2-1-2-6-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-6-7. If the processing is shifted and it is determined that the ART winning flag is not ON (step S302-3-2-1-2-6-6 = No), step S302-3-2-12-1-6 The process is shifted to -9.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-6-7)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-6-7, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the ART preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the ART preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the ART preparation state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-6-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-6-8.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-6-8)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-6-8, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the ART winning flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the ART winning flag in the ART winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-6-8 ends, the subroutine for the first bonus state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the condition device command reception process ends. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-6-9)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-6-9, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the first fall standby state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the first fall standby state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the first fall standby state. Do. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-6-9 ends, the subroutine for the first Bonus state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the condition device command reception process ends. The process is transferred to.

(Second Bonus state processing)
Next, based on FIG. 61, the second Bonus state performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the second Bonus state in the state-by-state transition process in Step S302-3-2-1 in FIG. The processing will be described. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the second Bonus state process.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-7-1)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-7-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the second bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the second bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-7-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-7-2.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-7-2)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-7-2, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART preparation state transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines that the winning combination included in the conditional device command is on condition that the value of the ART winning flag stored in the ART winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is OFF. Based on the above information and the second Bonus state ART ready state transition lottery table (see FIG. 31B) provided in the sub ROM 402, a process of lottering whether to shift to the ART ready state is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-7-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-7-3.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-7-3)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-7-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not it is determined to shift to the ART preparation state as a result of the lottery processing by the ART preparation state transition lottery process in step S302-3-2-1-2-7-2. Perform the process. And when it determines with having been elected (step S302-3-2-1-2-7-3 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-2-1-2-7-4, When it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-2-1-2-7-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-7-5.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-7-4)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-7-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning on the ART winning flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning on the ART winning flag in the ART winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-7-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-7-5.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-7-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-7-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second Bonus state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the second Bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-7-1. Then, a process of determining whether or not the value of the second bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 has become “0” is performed. If it is determined that the value of the second Bonus state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-7-5 = Yes), step S302-3-1-1— When the process proceeds to 2-1-7-6 and it is determined that the value of the second bonus state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-7-5). = No), the subroutine for the second Bonus state process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 in the condition device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-7-6)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-7-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the ART winning flag is ON. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the ART winning flag is ON based on a value stored in an ART winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the ART winning flag is ON (step S302-3-2-1-1-7-6 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-7-7. If the process is shifted and it is determined that the ART winning flag is not ON (step S302-3-2-1-2-7-6 = No), step S302-3-2-12-1-7 The process is shifted to -9.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-7-7)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-7-7, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the ART preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the ART preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the ART preparation state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-7-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-7-8.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-7-8)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-7-8, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the ART winning flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning off the ART winning flag in the ART winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-7-8 ends, the subroutine for the second Bonus state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the condition device command reception process ends. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-7-9)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-7-9, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the first fall standby state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the first fall standby state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the first fall standby state. Do. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-7-9 ends, the subroutine for the second Bonus state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the condition device command reception process ends. The process is transferred to.

(Process for 3rd Bonus state)
Next, based on FIG. 62, the third Bonus state performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the third Bonus state in the state-specific transition process of Step S302-3-2-1 in FIG. The processing will be described. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the third Bonus state process.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-8-1)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-8-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the third Bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the third bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-8-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-8-2.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-8-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-8-2, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART state game number addition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 adds the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the number of games for the ART state provided in the sub ROM 402 (the third Bonus state) (FIG. 32A). On the basis of (see)), the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-8-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-8-3.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-8-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-8-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. More specifically, the sub CPU 401 may increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state as a result of the lottery by the ART state game number addition lottery process in step S302-3-2-1-2-8-2. A process of determining whether or not it has been determined is performed. And when it determines with having been elected (step S302-3-2-1-2-8-3 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-2-1-2-8-4, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-2-1-2-8-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-8-5.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-8-4)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-8-4, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 indicates the number of games determined to be added as a result of the lottery processing by the lottery process for adding the number of games for the ART state in step S302-3-2-1-2-8-2. Is added to the ART state game number counter provided in. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-8-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-8-5.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-8-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-8-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the third Bonus state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the third Bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-8-1. Then, a process of determining whether or not the value of the third Bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0” is performed. If it is determined that the value of the third Bonus state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-8-5 = Yes), step S302-3-1-1— When the process proceeds to 2-1-8-6 and it is determined that the value of the third Bonus state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-8-5). = No), the third Bonus state process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 in the conditional device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-8-6)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-8-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the ART preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the ART preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the ART preparation state. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-8-6 ends, the third Bonus state processing subroutine ends, and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is transferred to.

(Processing for the first fall standby state)
Next, based on FIG. 63, in the state-by-state transition process in step S302-3-2-1-1 of FIG. 54, the process is performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the first fall standby state. The process for the one fall standby state will be described. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the first fall standby state processing.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-9-1)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-9-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a first falling standby state pull-out lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 stores information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and a pull-down lottery table for the first fall standby state provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 33A). Based on this, after the Bonus state is completed, a process of lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the ART preparation state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-9-1 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-9-2.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-9-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-9-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 has been determined to shift to the ART preparation state as a result of the lottery by the first falling standby state pull-out lottery process in step S302-3-2-1-1-9-1. Processing to determine whether or not. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-2-1-1-9-2 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-2-1-1-9-3, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-2-1-1-9-2 = No), the first fall standby state processing subroutine is terminated, and the conditional device command reception processing step is completed. The process proceeds to S302-3-1-2-2.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-9-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-3-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for changing the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the ART preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the ART preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the ART preparation state. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-9-3 is completed, the subroutine for the first fall standby state process is terminated, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process is terminated. The process is shifted to -2.

(ART preparation status processing)
Next, based on FIG. 64, in the state-by-state transition process in step S302-3-2-1-1 of FIG. The processing will be described. FIG. 64 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the ART preparation state processing.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-10-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-10-1, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART state game number addition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 adds information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the number of ART state games provided in the sub ROM 402, and the lottery table (ART preparation state / ART state) (FIG. 32). Based on (B), a process of drawing whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the ART state is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-10-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-10-2.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-10-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-10-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 may increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state as a result of the lottery by the ART state game number addition lottery process in step S302-3-2-1-1-10-1. A process of determining whether or not it has been determined is performed. And when it determines with having been elected (step S302-3-2-1-1-10-2 = Yes), a process is transferred to step S302-3-2-1-2-10-3, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-2-1-2-10-2 = No), the ART preparation state processing subroutine is terminated, and the conditional device command reception processing step S302 is completed. The process is transferred to 3-1-2-2.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-10-3)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-10-3, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART state game number counter addition process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 displays the number of games determined to be added as a result of the lottery process by the lottery process for adding the number of ART state games in step S302-3-2-1-1-10-1, in the sub RAM 403. Is added to the ART state game number counter provided in. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-10-3 ends, the ART preparation state process subroutine ends, and step S302-3-1-2-2 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is transferred to.

(ART status processing)
Next, based on FIG. 65, in the state-specific transition processing in step S302-3-2-1 in FIG. 54, the ART state processing performed when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the ART state. Will be described. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the ART state processing.

(Step S302-3-2-11-11-1)
In step S302-3-2-11-11-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-11-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-12-11-2.

(Step S302-3-2-1-11-11-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-11-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ART state fake game number counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ART state fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1” or more. If it is determined that the value of the fake game number counter for the ART state is “1” or more (step S302-3-2-12-11-2 = Yes), step S302-3-1 is performed. When the process proceeds to 2-1-11-3 and it is determined that the value of the ART state fake game number counter is not equal to or greater than “1” (step S302-3-2-12-1-11). -2 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-11-4.

(Step S302-3-2-1-11-11-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-11-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART state fake game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART state fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-1-11-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-11-4.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-11-4)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-11-4, the sub CPU 401 performs a stock lottery process to be described in detail later with reference to FIG. In the processing, the sub CPU 401 performs a lottery process or the like to determine whether or not to execute the continuous effect when the value of the ART state game number counter becomes “3” when the continuous effect execution flag is OFF. . When the process of step S302-3-2-12-1-11-4 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-11-5.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-11-5)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-11-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a lottery process by adding the number of ART state games. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 adds information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the number of ART state games provided in the sub ROM 402, and the lottery table (ART preparation state / ART state) (FIG. 32). Based on (B), a process of drawing whether or not to add the number of games that can be played in the ART state is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-11-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-11-6.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-11-6)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-11-6, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 may increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state as a result of the lottery by the ART state game number addition lottery process in step S302-3-2-1-1-11-5. A process of determining whether or not it has been determined is performed. And when it determines with having been elected (step S302-3-2-1-1-11-6 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-2-1-1-11-7, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-2-1-11-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-11-8.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-11-7)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-11-7, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART state game number counter addition process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 indicates the number of games determined to be added as a result of the lottery process by the lottery process for adding the number of games for the ART state in step S302-3-2-1-1-11-5. Is added to the ART state game number counter provided in. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-11-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-11-8.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-11-8)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-11-8, the sub CPU 401 performs a first extra state transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401, based on the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the first added state transition lottery table (see FIG. 34A) provided in the sub ROM 402, A process of drawing whether or not to shift to the first addition state is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-11-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-11-9.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-11-9)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-11-9, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not it is won. Specifically, whether or not the sub CPU 401 has determined to shift to the first added state as a result of the lottery process by the first added state shifting lottery process in step S302-3-2-1-1-11-8. The process which determines is performed. And when it determines with having been elected (step S302-3-1-2-1-11-9 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-2-1-1-11-10, When it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-2-1-11-11 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-11-12.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-11-10)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-11-10, the sub CPU 401 performs a first extra sign game number lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 is based on information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and a first extra sign game number determination table (see FIG. 27C) provided in the sub ROM 402. Then, the number of precursor games until the transition to the first extra preparation state is determined, and the value of the first extra precursor state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is set. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-11-10 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-11-11.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-11-11)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-11-11, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the first added sign state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the first surrender sign state in the status storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the first surrender sign state. Do. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-11-11 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-11-16.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-11-12)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-11-12, the sub CPU 401 performs a second added state transition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401, based on the information relating to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the second added state transition lottery table (see FIG. 34B) provided in the sub ROM 402, The lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the second added state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-11-12 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-11-13.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-11-13)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-11-13, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not it is won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not to shift to the second added state as a result of the lottery process by the second added state shifting lottery process in step S302-3-2-1-1-11-12. The process which determines is performed. And when it determines with having been elected (step S302-3-2-1-1-11-13 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-2-1-1-11-14, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-2-1-1-11-13 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-11-17.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-11-14)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-11-14, the sub CPU 401 performs a second extra sign game number lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 is based on the information relating to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the second added sign game number determination table (see FIG. 27D) provided in the sub ROM 402. Then, the number of precursor games until the transition to the second supplementary preparation state is determined, and the value of the second supplementary precursor game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is set. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-11-14 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-11-15.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-11-15)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-11-15, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the second added sign state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the second surplus sign state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the second surplus sign state. Do. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-11-15 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-11-16.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-11-16)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-11-16, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the ART state fake game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the ART state fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the processing of step S302-3-2-1-1-11-16 is completed, the ART state processing subroutine is terminated, and the conditional device command reception processing is advanced to step S302-3-1-2-2. Migrate processing.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-11-17)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-11-17, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the value of the ART state game number counter is “1” or more. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S302-3-2-11-11-1. Processing for determining whether or not the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub-RAM 403 is “1” or more is performed. When it is determined that the value of the ART state game number counter is “1” or more (step S302-3-2-1-1-11-17 = Yes), step S302-3-1-1 is performed. When the process proceeds to 2-1-11-18 and it is determined that the value of the ART state game number counter is not equal to or greater than “1” (step S302-3-1-2-1-11-17) = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-11-20.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-11-18)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-11-18, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ART state fake game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ART state fake game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0”. If it is determined that the value of the ART state fake game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-2-1-1-11-18 = Yes), step S302-3-1-1— If the process proceeds to 2-1-11-19 and it is determined that the value of the ART state fake game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-1-2-1-11-18) = No), the ART state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 of the conditional device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-11-19)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-11-19, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART state fake game number lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 is based on the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the ART state fake game number determination table (see FIG. 29B) provided in the sub ROM 402. Then, the number of ART state fake games is determined, and the value of the ART state fake game number counter provided in the sub-RAM 403 is set. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-11-19 ends, the ART state subroutine is terminated, and the conditional device command reception process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2. Migrate processing.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-11-20)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-11-20, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the fourth fall standby state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the fourth fall standby state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the fourth fall standby state. Do. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-11-20 ends, the ART state subroutine is terminated, and the conditional device command reception process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2. Migrate processing.

(Stock lottery processing)
Next, based on FIG. 66, the stock lottery process performed by the process of step S302-3-2-1-11-11 in FIG. 65 will be described. FIG. 66 shows a stock lottery processing subroutine.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-11-4-1)
In step S302-3-2-12-1-11-4-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the continuous performance execution flag is ON. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the continuous effect execution flag is ON based on the value stored in the continuous effect execution flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. And when it determines with a continuous production execution flag being ON (step S302-3-2-1-1-11-4-1 = Yes), step S302-3-2-12-1-11. When the process proceeds to -4--6 and it is determined that the continuous performance execution flag is not ON (step S302-3-2-1-11-11-4-1 = No), step S302-3 The process proceeds to -1-2-1-11-4-2.

(Step S302-3-2-1-11-11-4-2)
In step S302-3-2-12-1-11-4-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a continuous performance execution lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 uses the continuous effect execution lottery table (see FIG. 35) provided in the sub ROM 402 and the ART state game based on the information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command. When the value of the number counter becomes “3”, a process of determining whether or not to execute a continuous effect by lottery is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-1-11-4-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-11-11-4-3.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-11-4-3)
In step S302-3-2-12-1-11-4-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not it is won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 stores the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 as a result of the lottery by the continuous effect execution lottery process of step S302-3-2-1-11-11-4-2. When the value of the area is “3”, a process of determining whether or not to execute the continuous effect is performed. And when it determines with having been elected (step S302-3-2-1-1-11-4-3 = Yes), it processes to step S302-3-2-1-1-11-4-4. If it is determined that the winning is not made (step S302-3-2-1-1-11-4-3 = No), the stock lottery processing subroutine is terminated, and the ART state processing is completed. The process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-11-5.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-11-4-4)
In step S302-3-2-12-1-11-4-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning on the continuous effect execution flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning on the value of the continuous effect execution flag stored in the continuous effect execution flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-11-4-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-11-4-5.

  The sub CPU 401 performs control to turn off the value of the continuous effect execution flag stored in the continuous effect execution flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 at the timing when the execution of the continuous effect is finished.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-1-1-4-5)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-11-4-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a continuous effect reservation process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 continues when the value of the ART state game number counter storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 becomes “3” in the continuous effect information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. As information relating to the performance, processing for storing information relating to “enemy character A losing” is performed. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-11-4-5 ends, the stock lottery process subroutine ends, and step S302-3-2-1-2-11 of the ART state process ends. The process is shifted to -5.

  In the present embodiment, when the sub CPU 401 determines to execute a continuous effect as a result of the lottery performed by the continuous effect execution lottery process in step S302-3-2-1-11-11-4-2. As the information related to the continuous effect, the process of storing the information related to “losing the enemy character A” in the continuous effect information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed, but the present invention is not limited to this. . For example, information related to “loss of enemy character B” and information related to “loss of enemy character C” may be stored in a continuous effect information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403.

  Also, the information related to “Enemy character A win”, the information related to “Enemy character A revival”, the information related to “Enemy character B win”, the information related to “Enemy character B revival”, and “Enemy character C win”. Such information, information related to “enemy character C revival”, and information related to “enemy character A win” may be stored in a continuous effect information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. In this case, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning on the value of the set number extra winning flag in the extra number winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-1-1-4-6)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-11-4-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the set number addition winning flag is ON. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines whether or not the set number extra winning flag is ON based on the value stored in the extra number winning flag storing area provided in the sub RAM 403. Do. Then, when it is determined that the value of the winning combination addition flag is ON (step S302-3-1-2-1-11-4-6 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2 When the process proceeds to 1-11-4-12, and it is determined that the value of the winning flag added on the number of sets is not ON (step S302-3-1-2-1-11-4-6 = No) ), And the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-11-4-7.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-1-1-4-7)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-11-4-7, the sub CPU 401 performs the lottery process by adding the number of sets. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines the ART state game based on the set number addition lottery table (see FIG. 36) provided in the sub ROM 402 and information on the winning combination included in the conditional device command. After the value of the number counter becomes “0” and shifts to the fourth fall standby state, processing for determining whether to shift to the ART state again by lottery is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-11-4-7 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-11-4-8.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-1-1-4-8)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-11-4-8, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 determines that the value of the ART state game number counter is “0” as a result of the lottery by the set number addition lottery process in step S302-3-1-2-1-11-4-7. After shifting to the fourth fall standby state, a process is performed to determine whether or not it is determined to shift to the ART state again. If it is determined that the winning is made (step S302-3-2-1-1-11-4-8 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-11-4-9. When it is determined that the winning is not made (step S302-3-2-1-1-11-4-8 = No), the stock lottery processing subroutine is terminated, and the ART state processing is completed. The process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-1-11-5.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-1-1-4-9)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-11-4-9, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for adding the number of sets and turning on the winning flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for turning on the value of the set number extra winning flag stored in the extra number winning flag storing area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-11-4-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-11-4-10.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-11-4-10)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-11-4-10, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ART state game number counter is “3” or less. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “3” or less. When it is determined that the value of the ART state game number counter is equal to or smaller than “3” (step S302-3-2-1-11-14-10 = Yes), a stock lottery processing subroutine Is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-11-5 of the ART state process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the ART state game number counter is not equal to or less than “3” (step S302-3-2-1-1-11-4-10 = No), step S302-3- The processing shifts to 1-2-1-11-4-11.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-1-1-4-11)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-11-4-11, the sub CPU 401 performs a continuous effect correction process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of correcting a value stored in a continuous effect information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. More specifically, the value stored in the continuous effect information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is information related to “enemy character A losing”, information related to “enemy character B losing”, or “enemy character C”. In the case where the information related to losing is stored, if the winning combination flag is turned ON after the continuous production is started, the enemy character is used in the continuous production despite the transition to the ART state again. There is a problem that the production will be lost. In addition, when the enemy character is changed after the continuous production is started, there is a problem in that consistency between the continuous production before the change and the continuous production after the change cannot be obtained. For this reason, when the information related to “enemy character A losing” is stored in the continuous effect information storage area, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of correcting to “enemy character A win” or “enemy character A revival”. If the information related to “loss of enemy character B” is stored in the continuous performance information storage area, processing for correcting to “enemy character B wins” or “resurrection of enemy character B” is performed, and continuous performance information is stored. When information related to “enemy character C losing” is stored in the storage area, a process of correcting to “enemy character C win” or “enemy character C revival” is performed. When the processing of step S302-3-2-1-1-11-4-11 is completed, the stock lottery processing subroutine is terminated, and the ART state processing step S302-3-2-1-2-11 is completed. The process is shifted to -5.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-11-4-12)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-11-4-12, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the reserved continuous effect is “enemy character D wins”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not information relating to “enemy character D wins” is stored in the continuous effect information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. When it is determined that the reserved continuous effect is “enemy character D wins” (step S302-3-2-1-11-14-12 = Yes), a stock lottery processing subroutine Is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-11-5 of the ART state process. On the other hand, if it is determined that the reserved continuous performance is not “Enemy character D win” (step S302-3-2-1-11-14-12 = No), step S302-3- The processing is shifted to 1-2-1-11-4-13.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-11-4-13)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-11-4-13, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ART state game number counter is “3” or less. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “3” or less. Then, if it is determined that the value of the ART state game number counter is equal to or smaller than “3” (step S302-3-2-1-1-11-4-13 = Yes), a stock lottery processing subroutine Is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-11-5 of the ART state process. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value of the ART state game number counter is not equal to or smaller than “3” (step S302-3-2-1-11-11-4-13 = No), step S302-3- The process proceeds to 1-2-1-11-4-14.

(Step S302-3-1-2-1-11-4-14)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-11-4-14, the sub CPU 401 performs a continuous effect change lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 is provided in the sub RAM 403 based on the value of the continuous effect information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 and the continuous effect change lottery table (see FIG. 37) provided in the sub ROM 402. In addition to performing a lottery process to determine whether or not to change the continuous effect to be executed when the value of the ART state game number counter being “3” or less is set, the result of the lottery is provided in the sub-RAM 403. The storage process is performed in the continuous production information storage area. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-11-4-14 ends, the stock lottery process subroutine ends, and step S302-3-2-12-1-11 of the ART state process ends. The process is shifted to -5.

  Here, in the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-11-4-13, the process of determining whether or not the value of the ART state game number counter is “3” or less is performed. When the value of the ART state game number counter is “3” or less, that is, when the enemy character displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 is changed while the continuous performance is already being executed, This is because there is a possibility that the consistency of the performance may not be obtained. For example, it is assumed that when the value of the ART state game number counter is “3”, it is notified that the opponent is the enemy character A and the enemy character A attacks the teammate character. When the value of the ART state game number counter is “2”, when the continuous effect change lottery process of step S302-3-2-1-11-11-4-14 is executed, the opponent is changed. In this case, it is executed when the value of the ART state game number counter is “3” and when the value of the ART state game number counter is “2”. This is because the consistency of performance cannot be obtained. For this reason, in this embodiment, when the value of the ART state game number counter is “3” or less (step S302-3-1-2-1-11-4-13 = Yes), step S302 is performed. The continuous production change lottery process of 3-1-2-1-1-11-4-14 is not performed.

  However, when the set number extra winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is OFF, the values stored in the continuous effect information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 are “enemy character A lost”, “enemy If the character B is "lost" or "enemy character C is lost", the set number extra lottery process of step S302-3-2-1-11-11-4-7 is performed, and the set number extra winning flag is stored. When the area is turned on, the continuous effect correction process in step S302-3-2-1-1-11-4-11 is performed. Specifically, when the information stored in the continuous effect information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is information related to “enemy character A losing”, the sub CPU 401 determines “enemy character A wins”. When the information is rewritten to the information related to “enemy character A revival” or the information stored in the continuous effect information storage area provided in the sub-RAM 403 is information related to “loss of enemy character B” Is processed to rewrite information related to “Enemy character B win” or information related to “Enemy character B revival”, and the information stored in the continuous effect information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is “enemy”. In the case of the information relating to “character C losing”, the information relating to “enemy character C winning” or the information relating to “enemy character C revival” is written. The changing process is performed. Thereby, since enemy characters are common and only the final result is changed, it is possible to ensure the consistency of continuous performance.

(First extra sign state processing)
Next, based on FIG. 67, in the state-by-state transition processing in step S302-3-2-1-1 of FIG. A description will be given of the process for adding one sign state. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the first sign-on sign state processing.

(Step S302-3-2-12-12-1)
In step S302-3-2-12-12-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-12-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-12-1-12-2.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-12-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-2-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the first extra sign state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the first extra sign state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-1-12-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-12-3.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-12-3)
In step S302-3-2-12-1-12-3, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART state game number addition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 adds information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the ART state game number addition lottery table (addition sign state) provided in the sub ROM 402 (FIG. 32C). On the basis of (see)), the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-1-12-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-12-1-12-4.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-12-4)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-4-4, the sub CPU 401 performs a process for determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 may increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state as a result of the lottery by the lottery process by adding the number of ART state games in step S302-3-2-1-2-12-3. A process of determining whether or not it has been determined is performed. And when it determines with having been elected (step S302-3-2-12-1-12-4 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-2-1-12-12-5, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-2-12-1-12-4 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-12-1-12-6.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-12-5)
In step S302-3-2-12-1-12-5, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART state game number counter addition process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 indicates the number of games determined to be added as a result of the lottery processing by the ART state game number addition lottery process in step S302-3-2-1-2-12-3, as the sub RAM 403. Is added to the ART state game number counter provided in. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-1-12-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-12-1-12-6.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-12-6)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-12-6, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the first extra sign state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the first extra sign state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S302-3-2-12-12-2. As a result, a process of determining whether or not the value of the first extra sign state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 has become “0” is performed. When it is determined that the value of the first extra sign state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-12-6 = Yes), step S302-3- When the process proceeds to 1-2-1-12-7 and it is determined that the value of the first extra sign state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-1-2-1). -12-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-12-1-12-8.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-12-7)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-12-7, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the first addition preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the first addition preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the first addition preparation state. Do. When the process of step S302-3-2-12-1-12-7 is completed, the subroutine for the first sign of a precursor sign state is terminated, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process is terminated. The process is shifted to -2.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-12-8)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-12-8, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the ART state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S302-3-2-12-12-1. Processing for determining whether or not the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub-RAM 403 has become “0” is performed. When it is determined that the value of the ART state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-2-1-12-12 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2 is performed. The process proceeds to -1-12-9, and when it is determined that the value of the ART state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-12-8 = No). ), The first added sign state process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 in the condition device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-12-9)
In step S302-3-2-12-1-12-9, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state game number counter guarantee processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 prevents the ART state from ending because the value of the ART state game number counter becomes “0” even though it is determined to shift to the first additional state. Therefore, a process of copying the value of the first extra sign state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 to the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is performed. When the process of step S302-3-2-12-1-12-9 is completed, the subroutine for the first sign of precursor sign state is terminated, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process is terminated. The process is shifted to -2.

(First add-on preparation state process)
Next, based on FIG. 68, in the state-by-state transition process in step S302-3-2-1-1 of FIG. A description will be given of the process for the 1st addition preparation state. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the first add-on preparation state process.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-13-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-13-1, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART state game number addition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 adds information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the ART state game number addition lottery table (addition preparation state) provided in the sub ROM 402 (FIG. 32D). On the basis of (see)), the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-1-13-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-12-1-13-2.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-13-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-13-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 may increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state as a result of the lottery by the ART state game number addition lottery process in step S302-3-2-1-1-13-1. A process of determining whether or not it has been determined is performed. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-2-1-1-13-2 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-2-12-1-13-3, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-2-1-1-13-2 = No), the first add-on preparation state processing subroutine is terminated, and the conditional device command reception processing is completed. The process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-13-3)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-13-3, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART state game number counter addition process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 displays the number of games determined to be added as a result of the lottery process by the ART state game number addition lottery process in step S302-3-2-1-2-13-1, in the sub RAM 403. Is added to the ART state game number counter provided in. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-13-3 is completed, the first add-on preparation state process subroutine is terminated, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process is completed. The process is shifted to -2.

(Process for the first added state)
Next, based on FIG. 69, the first process performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the first added state in the state-by-state transition processing in step S <b> 302-3-2-1 in FIG. 54. The added state processing will be described. FIG. 69 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the first added state processing.

(Step S302-3-2-12-14-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-14-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the first added state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the first added state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-14-1 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-12-1-14-2.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-14-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-1-2, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART state game number addition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 adds information relating to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the ART state game number addition lottery table (first addition state) provided in the sub ROM 402 (FIG. 32 (E ))), A process of drawing whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-1-14-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-14-3.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-14-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-14-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 may increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state as a result of the lottery by the ART state game number addition lottery process in step S302-3-2-12-14-2. A process of determining whether or not it has been determined is performed. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-2-1-14-14 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-2-12-1-14-4, When it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-2-1-2-14-3 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-14-5.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-14-4)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-14-4, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 displays the number of games determined to be added as a result of the lottery process by the ART state game number addition lottery process in step S302-3-2-12-14-2. Is added to the ART state game number counter provided in. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-1-14-4 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-14-5.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-14-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-14-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the first added state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the first added state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the processing of step S302-3-2-12-14-1. As a result, a process of determining whether or not the value of the first added state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “0” is performed. When it is determined that the value of the first added state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-14-5 = Yes), step S302-3-1 is performed. When the process shifts to 2-1-14-6 and it is determined that the value of the first added game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-14). −5 = No), the first added state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 of the conditional device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-14-6)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-14-6, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the second fall standby state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the second fall standby state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the second fall standby state. Do. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-14-6 ends, the first added state processing subroutine ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the condition device command reception process ends. The processing is shifted to 2.

(Processing for second fall standby state)
Next, based on FIG. 70, in the state-by-state transition processing in step S302-3-2-1-1 of FIG. 54, the second control is performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the second fall standby state. The process for the 2-fall standby state will be described. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the second fall standby state process.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-15-1)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-15-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a lottery process by adding the number of ART state games. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 adds information relating to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the number of ART state games provided in the sub ROM 402, and the lottery table (second fall standby state) (FIG. 32 ( Based on G), a process of drawing whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-15-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-12-1-15-2.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-15-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-15-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 may increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state as a result of the lottery by the ART state game number addition lottery process in step S302-3-2-1-1-15-1. A process of determining whether or not it has been determined is performed. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-2-1-15-15 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-2-12-1-15-3, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-2-1-1-15-2 = No), the second fall standby state processing subroutine is terminated, and the conditional device command reception processing is terminated. The process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-15-3)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-15-3, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 indicates the number of games determined to be added as a result of the lottery process by the lottery process for adding the number of games for the ART state in step S302-3-2-1-15-1 to the sub RAM 403. Is added to the ART state game number counter provided in. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-15-3 is completed, the second fall standby state process subroutine is terminated, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process is terminated. The process is shifted to -2.

(Second extra sign state processing)
Next, based on FIG. 71, in the state-by-state transition processing in step S302-3-2-1-1 of FIG. 54, the second control is performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the second added sign state. 2 The process for the sign of a sign is added. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the second sign-on state process.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-16-1)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-16-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-1-16-1 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-12-1-16-2.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-16-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the second extra sign state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the second extra sign state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-1-16-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-16-3.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-16-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-16-3, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART state game number addition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 adds information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the ART state game number addition lottery table (addition sign state) provided in the sub ROM 402 (FIG. 32C). On the basis of (see)), the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-1-16-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-16-4.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-16-4)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-4-4, the sub CPU 401 performs a process for determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 may increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state as a result of the lottery by the ART state game number addition lottery process in step S302-3-2-1-16-16-3. A process of determining whether or not it has been determined is performed. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-2-1-16-16 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-2-1-1-16-5, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-2-1-16-16 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-16-16-6.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-16-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-16-5, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 indicates the number of games determined to be added as a result of the lottery process by the lottery process for adding the number of games for the ART state in step S302-3-2-1-16-16-3. Is added to the ART state game number counter provided in. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-1-16-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-16-6.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-16-6)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-6-6, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second extra sign state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the second extra sign state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S302-3-2-1-16-2. As a result, a process of determining whether or not the value of the second extra sign state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 has become “0” is performed. If it is determined that the value of the second extra sign state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-2-1-2-16-6 = Yes), step S302-3- When the process proceeds to 1-2-1-16-7 and it is determined that the value of the second extra sign state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-1-2-1). -16-6 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-12-1-16-8.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-16-7)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-16-7, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the second addition preparation state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the second addition preparation state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the second addition preparation state. Do. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-16-7 ends, the subroutine for the second surrender sign state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is shifted to -2.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-16-8)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-16-8, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the value of the ART state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-16-1. Processing for determining whether or not the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub-RAM 403 has become “0” is performed. If it is determined that the value of the ART state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-2-1-16-16 = Yes), step S302-3-1-2 is performed. When the process proceeds to -1-16-9 and it is determined that the value of the ART state game number counter is not "0" (step S302-3-2-1-16-16-8 = No) ), The second added sign state process subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 of the conditional device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-16-9)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-16-9, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state game number counter guarantee processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 prevents the ART state from ending because the value of the ART state game number counter becomes “0” even though it is determined to shift to the second additional state. For this purpose, processing is performed to copy the value of the second extra sign state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 to the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-16-9 ends, the subroutine for the second surrender sign state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is shifted to -2.

(Second add-on preparation state process)
Next, based on FIG. 72, in the state-by-state transition process of step S302-3-2-1-1 of FIG. The process for the 2 extra preparation state will be described. FIG. 72 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the second add-on preparation state process.

(Step S302-3-2-12-17-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-17-1, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART state game number addition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 adds information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the ART state game number addition lottery table (addition preparation state) provided in the sub ROM 402 (FIG. 32D). On the basis of (see)), the lottery process is performed to determine whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-17-1 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-12-1-17-2.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-17-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-17-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 may increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state as a result of the lottery by the ART state game number addition lottery process in step S302-3-2-1-1-17-1. A process of determining whether or not it has been determined is performed. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-2-1-1-17-2 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-2-1-1-17-3, If it is determined that the winning combination has not been won (step S302-3-2-1-1-17-2 = No), the second add-on preparation state processing subroutine is terminated, and the conditional device command reception processing is completed. The process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-17-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-3-3, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 indicates the number of games determined to be added as a result of the lottery process by the lottery process for adding the number of games for the ART state in step S302-3-2-1-1-17-1. Is added to the ART state game number counter provided in. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-17-3 ends, the subroutine for the second add-on preparation state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the condition device command reception process ends. The process is shifted to -2.

(Process for the second added state)
Next, based on FIG. 73, the second process performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the second added state in the state-by-state transition process in step S302-3-2-1-1 of FIG. The added state processing will be described. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the second added state process.

(Step S302-3-2-12-18-1)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-18-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the second added state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of subtracting “1” from the value of the second added state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-18-1 is completed, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-18-2.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-18-2)
In step S302-3-2-12-1-18-2, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART state game number addition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 adds information relating to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the ART state game number addition lottery table (second addition state) provided in the sub ROM 402 (FIG. 32 (F ))), A process of drawing whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-1-18-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-18-3.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-18-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-18-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 may increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state as a result of the lottery by the ART state game number addition lottery process in step S302-3-2-12-1-18-2. A process of determining whether or not it has been determined is performed. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-2-1-1-18-3 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-2-1-1-18-4, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-2-1-18-18 = No), the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-18-5.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-18-4)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-18-4, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 displays the number of games determined to be added as a result of the lottery process by the lottery process for adding the number of games for the ART state in step S302-3-2-1-2-18-2. Is added to the ART state game number counter provided in. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-1-18-4 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-1-18-5.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-18-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-18-5, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the value of the second added state game number counter is “0”. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 subtracts “1” from the value of the second added state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 by the process of step S302-3-2-1-1-18-1. As a result, a process of determining whether or not the value of the second added state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 has become “0” is performed. If it is determined that the value of the second added state game number counter is “0” (step S302-3-2-1-1-18-5 = Yes), step S302-3-1 is performed. When the process proceeds to 2-1-18-6 and it is determined that the value of the second added state game number counter is not “0” (step S302-3-2-12-1-18). -5 = No), the second added state processing subroutine is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2 in the conditional device command reception process.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-18-6)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-18-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the third fall standby state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the third fall standby state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the third fall standby state. Do. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-18-18-6 ends, the subroutine for the second added state process ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The processing is shifted to 2.

(Processing for the third fall standby state)
Next, based on FIG. 74, in the state-by-state transition process in step S302-3-2-1-1 of FIG. 54, the second process is performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the third fall standby state. The process for the 3-fall standby state will be described. FIG. 74 is a diagram showing a subroutine of third fall standby state processing.

(Step S302-3-2-1-1-19-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-19-1, the sub CPU 401 performs an ART state game number addition lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 adds information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the number of ART state games provided in the sub ROM 402, and the lottery table (third fall standby state) (FIG. 32 ( Based on H), a process of drawing whether or not to increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state is performed. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-1-19-1 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-12-1-19-2.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-19-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-19-2, the sub CPU 401 performs a process for determining whether or not it has been won. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 may increase the number of games that can be played in the ART state as a result of the lottery by the ART state game number addition lottery process in step S302-3-2-1-1-19-1. A process of determining whether or not it has been determined is performed. And when it determines with having won (step S302-3-2-1-19-19 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-2-1-1-19-3, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-2-1-19-19 = No), the third fall standby state processing subroutine is terminated, and the conditional device command reception processing is terminated. The process proceeds to step S302-3-1-2-2.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-19-3)
In step S302-3-2-1-1-19-3, the sub CPU 401 performs ART state game number counter addition processing. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 indicates the number of games determined to be added as a result of the lottery process by the lottery process for adding the number of games for the ART state in step S302-3-2-1-1-19-1 to the sub RAM 403. Is added to the ART state game number counter provided in. When the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-19-3 ends, the third fall standby state process subroutine ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is shifted to -2.

(Fourth fall waiting state process)
Next, based on FIG. 75, in the state-by-state transition process in step S302-3-2-1-1 of FIG. 54, the process is performed when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the fourth fall standby state. The 4-fall standby state process will be described. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing a subroutine of fourth fall standby state processing.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-20-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-20-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning number addition flag is ON. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the set number extra winning flag is ON based on the value of the set number extra winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. And when it determines with the number of sets addition winning flag being ON (step S302-3-2-12-1-20-1 = Yes), step S302-3-2-12-1-20- If the processing is shifted to 2 and it is determined that the number of sets added winning flag is not ON (step S302-3-2-1-20-1 = No), step S302-3-1-2 The process is shifted to -1-20-3.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-20-2)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-20-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for adding the number of sets and turning off the winning flag. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of turning off the set number extra winning flag stored in the sub number 403 set winning flag storing area provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-20-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-20-5.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-20-3)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-20-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a fourth falling standby state pull-out lottery process. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 stores information related to the winning combination included in the conditional device command and the fourth roll-down standby state pull-out lottery table (see FIG. 33B) provided in the sub ROM 402. Based on this, after the ART state is completed, a process of lottery is performed as to whether or not to shift to the ART state again. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-20-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-1-2-20-4.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-20-4)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-20-4, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the winning is made. Specifically, whether or not the sub CPU 401 has decided to shift to the ART state as a result of the lottery by the fourth fall waiting state pull-out lottery process in step S302-3-2-12-1-20-3. The process which determines is performed. And when it determines with having been won (step S302-3-2-1-20-20 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-2-1-20-20, If it is determined that it has not been won (step S302-3-2-1-2-20-4 = No), the fourth fall standby state processing subroutine is terminated, and the conditional device command reception processing step is completed. The process proceeds to S302-3-1-2-2.

(Step S302-3-2-12-1-20-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-2-1-1-20-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for changing the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the ART state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the ART state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the ART state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-12-1-20-5 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-2-12-1-20-6.

(Step S302-3-2-1-2-20-6)
In step S302-3-2-1-2-20-6, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “50” to the value of the ART state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “50” to the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-2-1-2-20-6 ends, the fourth fall standby state processing subroutine ends, and step S302-3-1-2 of the conditional device command reception process ends. The process is shifted to -2.

(Process when receiving display judgment command)
Next, based on FIG. 76, the process at the time of display determination command reception performed by the process of step S302-3-1-4 of FIG. 53 will be described. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a subroutine of processing at the time of display determination command reception.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1, the sub CPU 401 performs state-specific transition processing for receiving a display determination command. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing according to the state managed by the sub control board 400 based on the value of the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Here, in the state-by-state transition processing in step S302-3-1-4-1, a subroutine corresponding to the value of the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is provided (see FIGS. 77 to 84). Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-1-1 is completed, the subroutine of the display determination command reception process is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1 of the command-specific process.

(Process for Bonus preparation status when receiving display judgment command)
Next, based on FIG. 77, when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the Bonus preparation state in the display command reception state transition processing in step S302-3-4-1 of FIG. The processing for the Bonus preparation state at the time of display determination command reception to be performed will be described. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a subroutine for processing for preparing for a bonus when receiving a display determination command.

(Step S302-3-4-1-1-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-1-1, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not a Bonus replay is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not a symbol combination related to “Bonus Replay” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that the Bonus replay has been displayed (step S302-3-4-1-1-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-1-1-2. When it is determined that the Bonus replay is not displayed (Step S302-3-4-1-1-1 = No), the subroutine for the Bonus preparation state process at the time of receiving the display determination command is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1 of the command-specific process.

(Step S302-3-4-1-1-1-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-1-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the first Bonus is waiting. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the first Bonus standby is performed based on the value stored in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the first Bonus is waiting (step S302-3-4-1-1-2 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-1-1-1-3. If it is determined that the first Bonus is not waiting (step S302-3-4-1-1-1-2 = No), step S302-3-4-1-1-1-5 is performed. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-4-1-1-1-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-1-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the first Bonus state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the first Bonus state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the first Bonus state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-1-1-1-3 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-1-1-1-4.

(Step S302-3-4-1-1-1-4)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-1-4, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “30” to the value of the first Bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “30” to the value of the first bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. And if the process of step S302-3-1-4-1-1-4 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S302-3-4-1-1-1-10.

(Step S302-3-4-1-1-1-5)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-1-5, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not the second Bonus is waiting. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the second Bonus standby is based on the value stored in the Bonus standby information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. If it is determined that the second Bonus is waiting (step S302-3-4-1-1-1-5 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-1-1-1-6. If it is determined that the second Bonus is not waiting (step S302-3-4-1-1-1-5 = No), step S302-3-4-1-1-1-8 is performed. The process is transferred to.

(Step S302-3-4-1-1-1-6)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-1-6, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the second Bonus state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the second Bonus state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the second Bonus state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-1-1-1-6 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-1-1-1-7.

(Step S302-3-4-1-1-1-7)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-1-7, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “40” to the value of the second Bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “40” to the value of the second bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. And if the process of step S302-3-4-1-1-1-7 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S302-3-4-1-1-1-10.

(Step S302-3-4-1-1-1-8)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-1-8, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for changing the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the third Bonus state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the third Bonus state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the third Bonus state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-1-1-1-8 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-1-1-1-9.

(Step S302-3-4-1-1-1-9)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-1-9, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the third Bonus state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “50” to the value of the third bonus state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-1-1-1-9 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-1-1-1-10.

(Step S302-3-4-1-1-1-10)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-1-10, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “0” to the value of the ceiling game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “0” to the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-4-1-1-1-10 is completed, the subroutine for the Bonus preparation state process at the time of display determination command reception is terminated, and step S302-3-1-6 of the command-specific process is completed. The process is transferred to.

(Processing for the first fall standby state when a display judgment command is received)
Next, based on FIG. 78, the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the first fall standby state in the display command reception state transition process in step S302-3-4-1 of FIG. The process for the first fall standby state at the time of display determination command reception performed in this case will be described. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the first fall standby state process when a display determination command is received.

(Step S302-3-4-1-2-1)
In step S302-3-4-1-2-1-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a blank is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the symbol combination related to “blank” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that a blank is displayed (step S302-3-4-1-2-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-1-1-2-2. If it is determined that no blank is displayed (step S302-3-4-1-2-1 = No), the first fall standby state processing subroutine upon reception of the display determination command is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1 of the command-specific process.

(Step S302-3-4-1-1-2-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-2-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the normal state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the normal state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the normal state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-1-1-2-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-1-1-2-3.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-2-2-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-2-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “999” to the value of the ceiling game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “999” to the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-4-1-4-2-3 is completed, the subroutine for the first fall standby state process upon reception of the display determination command is terminated, and step S302-3-1 of the command-specific process is completed. The process is shifted to -6.

(Process for ART ready state when receiving display judgment command)
Next, based on FIG. 79, when the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the ART ready state in the display command reception state transition process of step S302-3-1-4-1 in FIG. The process for the ART preparation state at the time of display determination command reception to be performed will be described. FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a subroutine for the ART preparation state processing when a display determination command is received.

(Step S302-3-4-1-3-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-3-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not an ART replay is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not a symbol combination related to “ART replay” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that the ART replay has been displayed (step S302-3-4-1-3-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-1-4-1-2. When it is determined that the ART replay is not displayed (step S302-3-4-1-3-1 = No), the subroutine for the ART preparation state process upon reception of the display determination command is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1 of the command-specific process.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-3-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-3-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for changing the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the ART state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the ART state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the ART state. And if the process of step S302-3-1-4-1-3-2 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S302-3-1-4-1-3-3.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-3-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-3-3, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “50” to the value of the ART state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “50” to the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. Then, when the process of step S302-3-4-1-3-3 is completed, the subroutine of the ART preparation state process at the time of display determination command reception is terminated, and step S302-3-6-1-6 of the command-specific process is completed. The process is transferred to.

(Process for the first extra preparation state when a display judgment command is received)
Next, based on FIG. 80, the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the first addition preparation state in the display command reception state transition process in step S302-3-4-1 of FIG. The process for the first addition preparation state when receiving the display determination command will be described. FIG. 80 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the first added state process when a display determination command is received.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-4-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-4-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a RUSH replay is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not a symbol combination related to “RUSH replay” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that the RUSH replay has been displayed (step S302-3-4-1-4-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-1-4-2. If it is determined that the RUSH replay is not displayed (step S302-3-1-4-1-4-1 = No), the first addition preparation state processing subroutine upon reception of the display determination command , And the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-6 of the command-specific process.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-4-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-4-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the first added state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting the first added state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the first added state. And if the process of step S302-3-1-4-1-4-2 is complete | finished, a process will be transfered to step S302-3-1-4-1-4-3.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-4-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-4-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “10” to the value of the first added state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “10” to the value of the first added state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-1-4-1-4-3 is completed, the subroutine for the first addition preparation state process upon reception of the display determination command is terminated, and step S302-3-1 of the command-specific process is completed. The process is shifted to -6.

(Process for the second extra preparation state when a display judgment command is received)
Next, based on FIG. 81, the state managed by the sub-control board 400 in the state-by-state transition process for display command reception in step S302-3-1-4-1 in FIG. The processing for second addition preparation state at the time of display determination command reception performed in this case will be described. FIG. 81 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the second addition preparation state process when the display determination command is received.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-5-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-5-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a special replay is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a symbol combination related to “special replay” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that the special replay is displayed (step S302-3-1-4-1-5-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-4-1-5-2. If it is determined that the special replay is not displayed (step S302-3-4-1-5-1 = No), the second addition preparation state processing subroutine upon reception of the display determination command , And the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-6 of the command-specific process.

(Step S302-3-4-1-1-5-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-5-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the second addition state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the second added state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the second added state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-4-1-5-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-4-1-5-3.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-5-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-5-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “20” to the value of the second added state game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “20” to the value of the second added state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-1-4-1-5-3 is completed, the subroutine for the second addition preparation state process upon reception of the display determination command is terminated, and step S302-3-1 of the process for each command is completed. The process is shifted to -6.

(Processing for the second fall standby state when receiving the display judgment command)
Next, based on FIG. 82, the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the second fall standby state in the display command reception state transition process in step S302-3-4-1 in FIG. The processing for the second fall standby state at the time of display determination command reception performed in this case will be described. FIG. 82 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the second fall standby state process when a display determination command is received.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-6-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-6-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not an ART replay is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not a symbol combination related to “ART replay” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that the ART replay has been displayed (step S302-3-4-1-6-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-4-1-1-6-2. If it is determined that the ART replay is not displayed (step S302-3-4-1-6-1 = No), a subroutine for the second fall standby state process upon reception of the display determination command is performed. , And the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-6 of the command-specific process.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-6-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-6-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for changing the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the ART state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the ART state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the ART state. When the process of step S302-3-4-1-6-2 is completed, the subroutine for the second fall standby state process upon reception of the display determination command is terminated, and step S302-3-1 of the command-specific process is completed. The process is shifted to -6.

(Processing for the third fall standby state when a display judgment command is received)
Next, based on FIG. 83, the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the third fall standby state in the display command reception state transition process in step S302-3-4-1 of FIG. The process for the third fall standby state at the time of display determination command reception performed in this case will be described. Note that FIG. 83 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the third fall standby state process when a display determination command is received.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-7-1)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-7-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not an ART replay is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not a symbol combination related to “ART replay” is displayed on the active line. If it is determined that the ART replay is displayed (step S302-3-1-4-1-7-1 = Yes), the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-4-1-7-2. If it is determined that the ART replay is not displayed (step S302-3-4-1-7-1 = No), the third fall standby state processing subroutine upon reception of the display determination command , And the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-6 of the command-specific process.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-7-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-7-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for changing the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the ART state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the ART state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the ART state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-4-1-7-2 is completed, the subroutine for the second fall standby state process upon reception of the display determination command is terminated, and step S302-3-1 of the command-specific process is completed. The process is shifted to -6.

(Process for 4th fall waiting state when display judgment command is received)
Next, based on FIG. 84, the state managed by the sub-control board 400 is the fourth fall standby state in the display command reception state transition process in step S302-3-4-1 of FIG. The processing for the fourth fall standby state at the time of display determination command reception performed in this case will be described. FIG. 84 is a diagram showing a subroutine of the fourth fall standby state process when a display determination command is received.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-8-1)
In step S302-3-4-1-8-1, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for determining whether or not a blank is displayed. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of determining whether or not the symbol combination related to “blank” is displayed on the active line. And when it determines with the blank being displayed (step S302-3-1-4-1-8-1 = Yes), it transfers a process to step S302-3-1-4-1-8-2. If it is determined that no blank is displayed (step S302-3-1-4-1-8-1 = No), the fourth fall standby state processing subroutine upon reception of the display determination command is terminated. Then, the process proceeds to step S302-3-6-1 of the command-specific process.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-8-2)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-8-2, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the state managed by the sub control board 400 to the normal state. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting the normal state in the state storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 so that the state managed by the sub control board 400 becomes the normal state. Then, when the process of step S302-3-1-4-1-8-2 ends, the process proceeds to step S302-3-1-4-1-8-3.

(Step S302-3-1-4-1-8-3)
In step S <b> 302-3-4-1-8-3, the sub CPU 401 performs processing for setting “999” as the value of the ceiling game number counter. Specifically, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of setting “999” to the value of the ceiling game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403. When the process of step S302-3-1-4-1-8-3 ends, the subroutine for the fourth fall standby state process at the time of display determination command reception ends, and step S302-3-1 of the command-specific process ends. The process is shifted to -6.

(Timing chart in ART state and 4th fall standby state)
Next, a timing chart in the ART state will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, as shown in FIG. 85 (A), when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the ART state, the sub CPU 401 is a continuous effect execution lottery table provided in the sub ROM 402 (see FIG. 35). If it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed based on the above, the continuous effect execution flag in the continuous effect execution flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is turned ON.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (B), when the state managed by the sub control board 400 is the ART state, the sub CPU 401 performs step S302-3-2-1-1-11-4-7. When the lottery by the set number addition lottery process is won (step S302-3-2-1-11-11-4-8 = Yes), the set number extra winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is stored. The number of sets is added and the winning flag is turned ON.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85C, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of executing a continuous effect when the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 becomes “3”. .

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85D, when the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 becomes “0”, the sub CPU 401 shifts to the fourth fall standby state. Process.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 85 (E), the sub CPU 401 determines that the set number addition winning flag is ON in the process for the fourth fall standby state in the next game that has shifted to the fourth fall standby state (step). S302-3-2-1-2-20-1 = Yes), the number of sets is added and the process of turning off the winning flag is performed (step S302-3-2-1-2-20-2), and the sub control board The state managed by 400 is transferred to the ART state (step S302-3-2-1-2-20-5). Then, the sub CPU 401 performs a process of adding “50” to the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403.

  Here, in the fourth fall standby state process in the next game that has shifted to the fourth fall standby state, the sub CPU 401 places the combination of symbols related to the correct bell on the active line when the push order bell is won. Processing for notifying the operation order of the left stop button 11, the middle stop button 12, and the right stop button 13 for display is performed. As a result, when the ART state is completed and the number of sets added and the winning flag is ON, when the state is shifted to the ART state again, the gaming state managed by the main control board 300 is not dropped. The state managed by can be shifted to the ART state.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 401 executes the continuous effect based on the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 being “3”. There is no limit. For example, when the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub-RAM 403 becomes “0”, a continuous effect state that is shifted when executing the continuous effect is provided. It is good also as performing.

  In this case, in the continuous performance state, a lottery may be performed to determine whether or not to add the value of the ART state game number counter, or may not be performed. Here, in the case of performing a lottery to determine whether or not to add the value of the ART state game number counter, when the ART state game number counter value is added, the ART state continues and the set number is added and won. When the flag is ON, the state is shifted to the ART state again, so that the interest in the game is improved.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 401 performs the lottery process for adding the number of ART state games even when the value of the ART state game number counter is “3” or less (step S302-3-1-2). 1-1-1-5). For this reason, when the value of the ART state game number counter is added, the ART state is continued, and when the set number addition winning flag is ON, the state is again shifted to the ART state. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the value of the ART state game number counter is “3” or less, the ART state game number is added and the lottery process may not be performed.

(Animation that informs that continuous production will be executed)
Next, an animation for notifying that a continuous effect is executed will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, the display areas displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46 will be described with reference to FIG.

(Continuous production execution notification area 901)
The continuous effect execution notification area 901 is provided to notify whether or not it is determined to execute the continuous effect. Here, in this embodiment, the continuous production execution notification area 901 notifies the fact that the continuous production is not executed in the mode shown in FIG. 86A, and the continuous production is performed in the mode shown in FIG. 86B. Notify that it will be executed.

(Battle character notification area 902)
The battle character notification area 902 is provided in order to notify an enemy character that will battle in a continuous effect that starts when the value of the ART state game number counter becomes “3”. Specifically, the battle character notification area 902 includes an enemy character A notification area 902a for notifying that an effect of playing against the enemy character A is performed in the continuous performance, and an effect of playing the enemy character B in the continuous performance. Enemy character B notification area 902b for notifying that it is performed, enemy character C notification area 902c for notifying that an effect to play against enemy character C is performed in the continuous effect, and enemy character D in the continuous effect. It is configured by an enemy character D notification area 902d that notifies that an effect is performed.

(Enemy character A notification area 902a)
The enemy character A notification area 902a is provided to notify that an effect of playing against the enemy character A is performed in a continuous effect that starts when the value of the ART state game number counter reaches “3”. ing. Here, when the enemy character A notification area 902a notifies that an effect of playing against the enemy character A is performed, the enemy character B notification area 902b, the enemy character C notification area 902c, the enemy character D notification area 902d, It is preferable to perform display control in a different manner. In this embodiment, when notifying that an effect of playing against the enemy character A is performed, the enemy character B notification area 902b, the enemy character C notification area 902c, and the enemy character D notification area 902d are compared with the enemy. The character A notification area 902a is displayed in a bright color.

(Enemy character B notification area 902b)
The enemy character B notification area 902b is provided to notify that an effect of playing against the enemy character B is performed in a continuous effect that starts when the value of the ART state game number counter becomes “3”. ing. Here, when the enemy character B notification area 902b notifies that an effect of playing against the enemy character B is performed, the enemy character A notification area 902a, the enemy character C notification area 902c, the enemy character D notification area 902d, It is preferable to perform display control in a different manner. In this embodiment, when notifying that an effect of playing against the enemy character B is performed, the enemy character A notification area 902a, the enemy character C notification area 902c, and the enemy character D notification area 902d are compared with the enemy. The character B notification area 902b is displayed in a bright color.

(Enemy character C notification area 902c)
The enemy character C notification area 902c is provided to notify that an effect of playing against the enemy character C is performed in a continuous effect that starts when the value of the ART state game number counter reaches “3”. ing. Here, when the enemy character C notification area 902c notifies that an effect of playing against the enemy character C is performed, the enemy character A notification area 902a, the enemy character B notification area 902b, the enemy character D notification area 902d, It is preferable to perform display control in a different manner. In this embodiment, when notifying that an effect of playing against the enemy character C is performed, the enemy character A notification area 902a, the enemy character B notification area 902b, and the enemy character D notification area 902d are compared with the enemy. The character C notification area 902c is displayed in a bright color.

(Enemy character D notification area 902d)
The enemy character D notification area 902d is provided to notify that an effect of playing against the enemy character D is performed in a continuous effect that starts when the value of the ART state game number counter becomes “3”. ing. Here, when the enemy character D notification area 902d notifies that an effect of playing against the enemy character D is performed, the enemy character A notification area 902a, the enemy character B notification area 902b, the enemy character C notification area 902c, It is preferable to perform display control in a different manner. In this embodiment, when notifying that an effect of playing against the enemy character D is performed, the enemy character A notification area 902a, the enemy character B notification area 902b, and the enemy character C notification area 902c are compared with the enemy character D. The character D notification area 902d is displayed in a bright color.

(ART state continuation notification area 903)
The ART state continuation notification area 903 is provided to notify that the ART state continues. In other words, the ART state continuation notification area 903 can notify that the ART state continues only when the set number addition winning flag storage area provided in the sub RAM 403 is ON. Here, in this embodiment, the sub CPU 401 uses the ART state continuation notification area 903 only when information related to “enemy character D wins” is stored in the continuous effect information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. It is supposed to notify that the ART state continues.

  In the present embodiment, the sub CPU 401 stores information related to “enemy character A win”, information related to “resurrection of enemy character A”, and “enemy character B wins” in a continuous effect information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. ”,“ Enemy character B revival ”information,“ enemy character C win ”information, and“ enemy character C revival ”information are stored. It is good also as notifying that ART state continues using 903.

  First, as shown in FIG. 86A, in the ART state, when the continuous effect execution flag is OFF, the continuous effect execution notification area 901 notifies that the continuous effect is not executed. At this time, the battle character notification area 902 and the ART state continuation notification area 903 are displayed in a darker color than when the battle character is notified or when the ART state is continued.

  First, as shown in FIG. 86 (B), when the continuous effect execution flag is turned on in the ART state, the continuous effect execution notification area 901 notifies that the continuous effect is executed. At this time, the battle character notification area 902 displays the enemy character A notification area 902a in a brighter color than the enemy character B notification area 902b, the enemy character C notification area 902c, and the enemy character D notification area 902d. In the continuous performance, it is informed that the enemy character A will be played. The ART state continuation notification area 903 is displayed in a darker color as compared to the case where the ART state continuation is notified.

(Animation to notify that the continuous performance has been changed)
Next, with reference to FIG. 87, an animation for notifying that the continuous effect has been changed will be described.

  First, as shown in FIG. 87 (A), when the continuous effect execution flag is turned on in the ART state, the continuous effect execution notification area 901 notifies that the continuous effect is executed. At this time, the battle character notification area 902 displays the enemy character A notification area 902a in a brighter color than the enemy character B notification area 902b, the enemy character C notification area 902c, and the enemy character D notification area 902d. In the continuous performance, it is informed that the enemy character A will be played. The ART state continuation notification area 903 is displayed in a darker color as compared to the case where the ART state continuation is notified.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 87 (B), the continuous effect executed by the continuous effect change lottery process in step S302-3-2-1-11-14-14 is changed from “enemy character A losing”, When it is changed to “enemy character B loss”, the battle character notification area 902 is compared with the enemy character A notification area 902a, enemy character C notification area 902c, and enemy character D notification area 902d. The display is switched so that 902b is displayed in a bright color. Thereby, it is notified that the enemy character B is played in the continuous performance.

(An animation that informs you that winning is confirmed in a continuous performance)
Next, with reference to FIG. 88, a description will be given of an animation for notifying that winning is confirmed in the continuous performance.

  First, as shown in FIG. 88 (A), when the continuous effect execution flag is turned on in the ART state, the continuous effect execution notification area 901 notifies that the continuous effect is executed. At this time, the battle character notification area 902 displays the enemy character A notification area 902a in a brighter color than the enemy character B notification area 902b, the enemy character C notification area 902c, and the enemy character D notification area 902d. In the continuous performance, it is informed that the enemy character A will be played. The ART state continuation notification area 903 is displayed in a darker color as compared to the case where the ART state continuation is notified.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 88 (B), the continuous effect executed by the continuous effect change lottery process of step S302-3-2-1-11-14-14 is changed from “enemy character A losing”, When changed to “enemy character D win”, the battle character notification area 902 is compared with the enemy character A notification area 902a, enemy character B notification area 902b, and enemy character C notification area 902c. The display is switched so that 902d is displayed in a bright color. Thereby, it is notified that the enemy character D is played in the continuous performance. Then, the ART state continuation notification area 903 is displayed in a brighter color as compared to the case where the ART state continuation notification is not performed.

(Animation displayed on the liquid crystal display device when continuous production is executed)
Next, an animation displayed on the liquid crystal display device when a continuous effect is executed will be described with reference to FIG.

  First, as shown in FIG. 89A, the sub CPU 401 is a case where information related to “enemy character A win” is stored in the continuous effect information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403, and the sub RAM 403. When the value of the ART state game number counter provided at is “3”, control is performed to display on the liquid crystal display device 46 that the enemy character A and the teammate character are fighting.

  Then, the sub CPU 401 displays on the liquid crystal display device 46 that the enemy character A and the teammate character will battle each other, and then displays an image in which the teammate character attacks the enemy character A as shown in FIG. 89B. The control to display on 46 is performed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 89C, when the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “2”, the sub CPU 401 is an image in which the enemy character A attacks the teammate character. Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 89D, when the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 is “1”, the sub CPU 401 defeats the enemy character A. Is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 46. As a result, it is informed that the transition to the ART state is made again.

  Note that, as shown in FIG. 89E, the sub CPU 401 stores the information related to “enemy character A loss” in the continuous effect information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. When the value of the provided ART state game number counter is “1”, control is performed to display on the liquid crystal display device 46 an image in which the teammate character is defeated by the enemy character A. As a result, it is notified that the state does not shift to the ART state again.

  In the present embodiment, the ART state and the like are managed by the sub control board 400, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the ART state or the like may be managed by the main control board 300.

  Thus, according to the present invention, in the ART state, the sub CPU 401 performs “ART replay AR1”, “ART replay AR2”, “ART replay AR3”, “ART replay AR4”, or “normal replay”. "Is determined, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to execute the continuous performance. Further, after it is determined that the continuous effect is to be executed, the sub CPU 401 uses the lot number drawing table with the number of sets provided in the sub ROM 402 to determine whether or not to shift to the ART state again after the ART state is ended. The lottery is performed. Then, when the value of the ART state game number counter provided in the sub RAM 403 becomes “3”, the sub CPU 401 stores the continuous effect stored in the continuous effect information storage area provided in the sub RAM 403. Control to execute. As a result, after the re-game is won in the ART state, the lottery table for adding the number of sets is used to determine whether or not to shift to the ART state again after the ART state ends. It is possible to prevent the game in the ART state from becoming monotonous.

  In the present embodiment, a gaming machine used for a spinning machine (slot machine) has been described. However, the gaming machine may be used for a pachinko gaming machine, a sparrow ball gaming machine, or an arrangement ball gaming machine.

1 gaming machine 2 cabinet 3 front door 4 hinge mechanism 5 key hole 6 medal slot 7 BET button 7sw BET switch 8 MAXBET button 8sw MAXBET switch 9 settlement button 9sw settlement switch 10 start lever 10sw start switch 11 left stop button 11sw left stop switch 12 Middle stop button 12sw Middle stop switch 13 Right stop button 13sw Right stop switch 14 Return button 15 Selector 15s Selector sensor 16s Error release sensor 17s Door open / close sensor 18 Left reel 19 Middle reel 20 Right reel 21 Production button 22 Cross key 23 Display window 24 Start lamp 25 1st BET lamp 26 2nd BET lamp 27 3rd BET lamp 28 Stored number display device 29 Discharged number display device 30 Allowable display lamp 31 Replay display Amplifier 32 Bonus display unit 33 ART display unit 34 RUSH display unit 35 stop button operation display unit 35L left stop button operation display section 35C in the stop button operation display unit 35R right stop button operation display unit 36 start lever LED
37 Waist panel 38 Receptacle unit 39 Medal payout opening 40 Upper left speaker 41 Lower left speaker 42 Upper right speaker 43 Lower right speaker 44 Setting display section 45 Setting change button 45sw Setting change switch 46 Liquid crystal display device 47 External concentration terminal board 48 Setting change Key hole 49sw Setting change key switch 50 Production device 51 Base portion 52 Handle portion 53 Sheath portion 100 Status board 150 Reel control board 151 Left stepping motor 152 Middle stepping motor 153 Right stepping motor 154s Left reel sensor 155s Middle reel sensor 156s Right reel sensor 200 power board 201 power button 201sw power switch 202 hopper 203 auxiliary storage 203s auxiliary storage sensor 204 discharge slit 205 hopper guide member 206 guide member 07 dispensing guide member 250 set the switch board 300 the main control board 301 the main CPU
302 Main ROM
303 Main RAM
304 Main random number generator 400 Sub control board 401 Sub CPU
402 Sub ROM
403 Sub RAM
404 Sub-random number generator 450 Backlight relay board 451 Left backlight board 452 Middle backlight board 453 Right backlight board 461 Left backlight 462 Middle backlight 463 Right backlight 500 Amplifier board 600 Production control board 601 Production control CPU
602 Production control ROM
603 Production control RAM
604 CGROM
605 Sound source IC
606 Sound source ROM
607 VDP
650 effect device drive board 651 left effect device motor 652s upper left effect device sensor 653s lower left effect device sensor 654 right effect device motor 655s upper right effect device sensor 656s lower right effect device sensor 657s left liquid crystal lift motor 658s left upper liquid crystal lift sensor 659s lower left liquid crystal lift Sensor 660 Right liquid crystal lift motor 661s Upper right liquid crystal lift sensor 662s Lower right liquid crystal lift sensor 700 Panel LED relay board 701 MAXBET button LED board 702 Stop button LED board 703 Production button LED board 704 Lumbar panel LED board 705 Bonus display LED board 706 ART display LED board 707 RUSH display LED board 708 Stop button operation LED board 709 Start lever LED board 710 s Production button sensor 711 Cross key board 7 21 MAXBET button LED
722 Stop button LED
722L Left stop button LED
722C Middle stop button LED
722R Right stop button LED
723 Production Button LED
724 Lumbar panel LED
750 Production device drive relay board 800 Production device control board 801 Upper left production apparatus board 802 Lower left production apparatus board 803 Upper right production apparatus board 804 Lower right production apparatus board 811 Upper left production apparatus 812 Left lower production apparatus 813 Upper right production apparatus 814 Lower right production apparatus 850 LED control board 851 Top LED board 852 Corner LED board 853 Side LED board 854 Receptacle side LED board 855 Receptacle LED board 861 Top LED
862 Corner LED
863 Side LED
864 saucer side LED
865 Receptacle LED
901 Continuous performance execution notification area 902 Competitor character notification area 902a Enemy character A notification area 902b Enemy character B notification area 902c Enemy character C notification area 902d Enemy character D notification area 903 ART state continuation notification area

In order to solve such a problem, a gaming machine according to the present invention includes a plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols arranged on a peripheral surface, a start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by a player, and the start operation. A winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination based on the detection of the start operation by the detection means, and the reels based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means. Reel rotation control means for performing rotation control, stop operation detection means provided for each of the plurality of reels to detect a stop operation by a player, and the stop operation detected by the stop operation detection means and, based on the determined winning combination by the winning combination determination means, and stop control means for stopping the reel that is rotated by the reel rotation control means, the player A normal state control means for controlling the adverse normal state taking, as compared to the normal state, a specific state control means for controlling the specific state probability replay is determined is higher by the winning combination determination means the in certain conditions, by the winning combination determination means, based on the replay is won, continuous demonstration run lottery performing lottery whether or not to execute a continuous directing of Jo Tokoro timing performed over a plurality of game And means for storing the continuous effect to be executed when the continuous effect is determined by the continuous effect execution lottery means, and the specific state by the specific state control means. When the information on the continuous performance to be executed is stored by the continuous performance information storage means, the winning combination determining means Based on the determined winning combination, in the case where it is determined that the privilege grant lottery means for performing the lottery of whether or not to grant a privilege to the player, and the privilege grant lottery means to grant the privilege, Based on the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means, continuous effect information changing lottery means for performing a lottery to determine whether or not to change the information of the continuous effect to be executed stored in the continuous effect information storage means. And changing the information of the continuous effect to be executed stored in the continuous effect information storage means when it is determined by the continuous effect information changing lottery means to change the information of the continuous effect to be executed. The continuous production information changing means for performing the continuous production information at the predetermined timing based on the information of the continuous production to be executed stored in the continuous production information storage means. And a continuous production execution means for performing the production .

Claims (3)

A plurality of reels having a plurality of symbols arranged on the circumferential surface;
Start operation detecting means for detecting a start operation by the player;
A winning combination determining means for determining a winning combination based on the detection of the start operation by the start operation detecting means;
Reel rotation control means for performing control to rotate the plurality of reels based on the start operation detected by the start operation detection means;
Stop operation detecting means provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels, and detecting a stop operation by a player;
Stop control means for stopping the reel being rotated by the reel rotation control means based on the detection of the stop operation by the stop operation detecting means and the winning combination determined by the winning combination determining means. When,
Normal state control means for controlling the normal state disadvantageous to the player;
A specific state control means for controlling a specific state with a high probability that a replay is determined by the winning combination determining means as compared to the normal state;
In the specific state, based on the fact that the re-winning game is won by the winning combination determining means, continuous effect execution lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to execute a continuous effect performed over a plurality of games at a predetermined timing; ,
When the continuous production execution lottery means decides to execute the continuous production, continuous production information storage means for storing information on the continuous production to be executed;
When the continuous effect information storage means stores information on the continuous effect to be executed, the information is stored in the continuous effect information storage means based on the fact that a predetermined winning combination is determined by the winning combination determining means. Continuous production information changing lottery means for performing lottery of whether to change the information of the continuous production to be executed,
When the continuous production information changing lottery means decides to change the information of the continuous production to be executed, control is performed to change the information of the continuous production to be executed stored in the continuous production information storage means. Continuous production information changing means;
At the predetermined timing, based on the information of the continuous effect to be executed stored in the continuous effect information storage unit, continuous effect executing means for executing the continuous effect;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising: Continuous production execution informing means for informing that the continuous production information to be executed is stored in the continuous production information storage means;
The gaming machine according to claim 1, further comprising: Continuous production change notification means for notifying that the information of the continuous production to be executed stored in the continuous production information storage means has been changed by the continuous production information change means;
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, further comprising: